JP6813062B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional game machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. Further, there is for the display device, some are also allowed to display various images such as a character or a landscape in addition to the symbol.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-325886

However, in the conventional gaming machines, there is a possibility to set a good optimal display content she can such Kuna'.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which can be set to a suitable display.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a display means capable of displaying identification information and a first aspect in which the identification information is predetermined in the display means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. at least, dynamic display unit be dynamically displays the identification information in the first dynamic display mode configured to include at least a first mode period that will be dynamically displayed, dynamic display of the identification information It is provided with a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the predetermined specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the above, and the predetermined specific condition is satisfied. based on the identification information of the dynamic display and display control means for displaying on said display means the different specific display and dynamic display period at least partially overlaps with the display period of the previous SL specific display of the identification information dynamic display as a dynamic display mode when starting the said identification information is dynamic display the identification information in the first embodiment is in the second aspect is easily the specific display is visible than Ru dynamically displayed the second and the second dynamic display mode configured aspects period contains at least, the second aspect in the identification information dynamically displayed the specific display of the display range is wide for that display mode than if that is the third aspect is a period in which the identification information in the third embodiment is the dynamic display was the identification information in the first embodiment and is a display mode that the specific display is easily visible than Ru dynamically displayed in period and a mode setting means capable of setting a plurality of dynamic display dynamic display of embodiments including one that includes at least a third dynamic display mode, the configured at least contain.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is configured to be playable using a predetermined gaming medium in the gaming machine according to claim 1.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a display capable of displaying means identification information, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification information in the display unit Ru is dynamically displayed in a first aspect to a predetermined first A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information in a first dynamic display mode including at least one mode period, and a specific predetermined specific in the dynamic display of the identification information. The identification information is provided with a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the stop display of the identification information, and the identification information is based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition. initiate a dynamic display of the identification information of the dynamic display period and display control means for displaying a different specific display on the display means, which at least partially the display period before Symbol specific display overlaps the dynamic display of as a dynamic display mode when the second mode period in which the identification information in the second aspect of the specific display is easily visible is dynamically displayed than the identification information in the first embodiment is Ru dynamically displayed including at least a second dynamic display mode configured to the second aspect in the identification information of the first aspect there is provided a the specific display of the display range is wide for that display mode than when it is dynamically displayed the identification information is to include at least constituting a third aspect period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed in the third aspect is a display mode that the specific display is easily visible than Ru dynamically displayed in A third dynamic display mode, and a mode setting means that can be set to one of a plurality of dynamic display modes including at least one of the dynamic display modes.

Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to set a good optimal display.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen when the time effect is started 5 seconds before the start of the time effect during the variable display of the third symbol, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the variable display of the third symbol. It is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen at the time of the start timing of the time production in. (A) is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen when the time effect is 5 seconds before the start of the time effect during the final display of the third symbol, and (b) is the final display of the third symbol. It is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen at the time of the start timing of the time production in. It is a figure exemplifying the actual display screen when it becomes 5 seconds before the time production starts during the demonstration production. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of the effect during the time effect. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of the effect during the time effect. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 6C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the variation pattern table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the time production table schematically. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of an RTC. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the data table storage area schematically. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface C. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the time setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the elapsed time confirmation process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control process. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the back image change command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the confirmation display setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the demo display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen when the time effect is started 5 seconds before the start of the time effect during the final display of the third symbol in the second embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen when the start timing of the time effect is reached during the final display of the third symbol in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the back image change command process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the data table storage area in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop display selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the background image change command process 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the confirmation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in 3rd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 10) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 228 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 228 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. Be manipulated.

The stage is a production mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified. In this pachinko machine 10, there are three stages: "city stage", "sky stage", and "island stage". There are two stages. Then, various effects such as variable effects and reach effects that are performed when the ball enters the first ball opening 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The stage is changed when the frame button 228 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 228 is operated, "city stage" → "empty stage" "→" Island stage "→" City stage "→ ... It is changed repeatedly in this order. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 228 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

Below the window portion 14c, a ball lending operation portion 40 is arranged. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launching unit 112a. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The ball entry port 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 10) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when the ball enters the first entrance 64, and when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, a normal symbol (first symbol) is drawn. 2 symbols) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. Is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are two types of jackpots for special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the jackpot, the game according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds to 30 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of ball entries is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol. It is shown by the device 37 and also shown by the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the variation display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The specific winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first entry opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is a hit. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. Become in a state. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the first ball entry port 64, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the number of reserved balls 37. It is also indicated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variation display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variation display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

As described above, there are two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B".

When "Big hit A" and "Big hit B" are reached, the number of rounds is 16 rounds in a special gaming state (16R big hit). Furthermore, in "Big hit A", as an added value after the big hit ends, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) after the end of the big hit, and the hit probability of the normal symbol increases. To do. This high-probability state of the special symbol and the state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased will continue until at least the next big hit of the special symbol. On the other hand, when it becomes "big hit B", as an added value after the big hit ends, the winning probability of the normal symbol increases from the end of the big hit until the lottery of the special symbol ends 100 times.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, the probability state of the so-called special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (16R jackpot). ) Is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). Further, the "normal symbol time saving state" (normal symbol time saving middle) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64. On the other hand, the time when it is not "the time saving state of the normal symbol" is called "the normal state of the normal symbol", which indicates that the hit probability of the normal symbol is the normal state, that is, the state where the hit probability is lower than that during the time saving. ..

After that, the period from the end of the big hit of the special symbol to the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol, that is, from the end of the "big hit A" to the next big hit of the special symbol. Is called the probability change period of the special symbol. Further, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as the normal symbol time reduction period.

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is common regardless of the type of jackpot, and whether or not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is obtained according to the type of jackpot. It's different. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period during which the "normal symbol is shortened" may be changed according to the type of jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the period during which the "normal symbol time is shortened", the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first ball opening 64 or the electric accessory per hit of the ordinary symbol You may change the number of times you open an object. Further, in the present embodiment, the "high probability state of the special symbol" is obtained from the end of the "big hit A" to the next big hit of the special symbol, but after the jackpot is completed, the special symbol lottery is performed, for example. It may be configured to be in the "high probability state of the special symbol" only until the end of 100 times. It should be noted that 100 times is just an example, and the number of lottery of special symbols may be arbitrarily determined.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type becomes "big hit B", the time saving state of the normal symbol is continued from the end of the "big hit B" until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times, but the time saving state is continued. The period may be set arbitrarily. For example, when the jackpot type becomes "big hit B", the time saving state of the normal symbol may be continued from the end of the "big hit B" until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 50 times.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the "low probability state of the special symbol". After that, it becomes "big hit B", and when it shifts from "normal state of normal symbol" to "time saving state of normal symbol", the state is from the end of the jackpot of the special symbol to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times. Will be continued. On the other hand, if a new special symbol jackpot is not achieved by the end of the 100 special symbol lottery after the special symbol jackpot, the process returns to the "normal state of the normal symbol".

Then, if a new "big hit B" is reached while the "normal symbol time saving state" is being continued, the "normal symbol time saving state" is further 100 times after the end of the new "big hit B". It will continue until the lottery of special symbols is completed. For example, if it becomes "big hit B" and shifts to "normal symbol time saving state" and then becomes "big hit B" in the 10th special symbol lottery, the "normal symbol time saving state" is further changed to that "big hit B". After the end, the lottery of special symbols will continue until 100 times.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or the change of the balls entered in the first entry port 64 is not executed. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (held balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, it corresponds to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) with that as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 9. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 10) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. Further, in the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. By displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period of time (1 second or more) in this way, whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is). Further, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the detachment and there is a reserved ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first ball entry port 64. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect (see FIG. 7) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. Even though the player fires the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), it is rare that the ball does not enter the first ball entry port 64, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed. In many cases where the state is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), the player quits the game, and the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entry port 64 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the new entry is executed. Will be done.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 are areas for displaying the preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action or another character performs a predetermined action. A notice production will be performed by appearing.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the maximum number of ball entries is four. It is held, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that there are 4 balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it means that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9, a time effect, which is one of the effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, will be described. This time effect is an effect that is executed according to the elapsed time from when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and is a special aspect different from the effect that is normally executed (see FIG. 4B). The production of is executed. This time effect is an effect that is executed every hour and continues for 3 minutes. Since it is executed only for 3 minutes out of 1 hour, it is possible to make the player feel novel by executing the time effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, since the time production is configured to be executed at a fixed interval (every hour), the player can be made to play the game aiming at the execution period of the time production, or the time production is about to start. It is possible to make a player who is about to quit the game want to continue the game until the next time production is completed and enjoy the time production. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Although details will be described later, the elapsed time since the power is turned on is determined based on the time information measured by the RTC 292 (see FIG. 10) that is electrically connected to the voice lamp control device 113. Will be done.

FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a case where the number of reserved balls is three and the start timing of the time effect is reached during the variable display of the third symbol. FIG. 5A is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 5 seconds before the start of the time effect. As shown in FIG. 5A, 5 seconds before the start of the time effect, the characters "contact time 5 seconds before" are displayed in the small area Ds3. This "contact time" means the above-mentioned time effect, and the effect as if the player is actually in contact with the dog character 740 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed. It is named "Fureai Time". With this display, it is possible to notify the player that it is 5 seconds before the start of the time effect. Further, among the characters displayed in the small area Ds3, the content of the number of seconds is changed according to the elapsed time. For example, if it is 3 seconds before the start of the time effect, the characters "contact time 3 seconds before" are displayed in the small area Ds3.

In the small area Ds1 (see FIG. 5A), three reserved ball number symbols are displayed. According to the reserved ball number symbol, the player can easily recognize that the current number of reserved balls is three. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, in the main display area Dm, the changing third symbol is displayed in a translucent manner. That is, the back image displayed on the back of the third symbol is displayed in a manner that the player can clearly see. In this way, the variable effect of the third symbol is displayed in a semi-transparent manner because the third symbol is superimposed on the front side of the display (notification image 750) that announces the start of the time effect. This is to prevent (suppress) the notification image 750 from becoming difficult to see (that is, the notification image 750 is shielded by the third symbol).

Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to change the display mode of the variation effect of the third symbol based on the start timing of the time effect. Then, the changing third symbol is displayed in a semi-transparent manner only when the third symbol is in a fluctuating state during the display period of the notification image 750. For example, if it is determined that only the stop display period of the third symbol after the end of the fluctuation overlaps with the display period of the notification image 750, the fluctuation effect of the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right of the main display area Dm. This is configured to prevent the third symbol from blocking the notification image 750.

FIG. 5B is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 at the start timing of the time effect. As shown in FIG. 5B, when the start timing of the time production is reached, a character (book) different from the character 710 (in the present embodiment, a boy with a headband) displayed in the small area Ds2 at normal times. In the embodiment, the dog character 740) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that an unusual effect is executed. Further, the characters displayed in the small area Ds3 are updated to the characters "contact time 0 seconds before", and the characters "contact time rush !!" are displayed in the main display area Dm. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the execution period (contact time) of the time effect has been reached.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the changing third symbol is displayed in a semi-transparent manner, so that the player can display the characters "Fureai time rush !!" displayed to announce the start of the time production. Can be clearly seen. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more surely recognize the start of the time production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the display contents when the start timing of the time effect is reached in the state where the third symbol is confirmed and displayed will be described. In addition, the final display means that there is no reserved ball at the stage when the variation effect is completed and the stop display period (1 second) of the third symbol has elapsed, and there is no entry into the first entry port 64. It is a production that is performed in some cases. Specifically, it refers to the display content in which the third symbol, which has been stopped and displayed for 1 second, is continuously displayed in the main display area Dm.

FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a case where the time effect is 5 seconds before the start of the time effect in the state where the third symbol is confirmed and displayed. As shown in FIG. 6A, when the third symbol is confirmed and displayed, the third symbol is stationary in the main display area Dm. In the example of FIG. 6A, when the third symbol numbered “2”, “5”, “7” is stopped on the effective line L1 of each symbol sequence Z1, Z2, Z3, respectively. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 6A, when the third symbol is confirmed and displayed, most of the rear image is shielded by the third symbol. That is, it becomes difficult for the player to see the rear image. Even if the notification image 750 is displayed in the main display area Dm in this state, most of the notification image 750 is shielded by the third symbol, and the player may overlook the start of the time effect. As described above, the time effect is a special effect that is displayed only for a limited period (3 minutes out of 1 hour). Therefore, let the player play the game on the pachinko machine 10 looking forward to the time effect. Can be done. Therefore, there is a risk that the player quits the game without noticing the notification image 750 even though the time production has started. Furthermore, if the player who was originally playing the game notices the time production after quitting the game without noticing the start of the time production and another player starts the game with the pachinko machine 10, the original time production is performed. There is a risk of dissatisfaction with the player who was playing the game.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the start timing of the time effect is reached, the third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm is erased, and then a display is performed to announce the start of the time effect (the notification image 750 is displayed). ). As a result, as shown in FIG. 6B, the characters "contact time rush !!" are displayed in the main display area Dm without being shielded at all. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the time production has started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing the notification image 750, so that the game during the time production can be surely enjoyed.

Further, if the confirmation display effect is simply not displayed (that is, the third symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second and then erased), the player may overlook the third symbol that was previously stopped and displayed. .. Since the third symbol displayed as stopped indicates the lottery result of the special symbol, if the third symbol is configured so as to be easily overlooked, the player may be dissatisfied with the pachinko machine 10. In general, a player plays a game with a pachinko machine 10 for one purpose of becoming a big hit, and if it becomes difficult to confirm whether or not it is a big hit, the interest will be lost.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to display the third symbol for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) when 1 second or more has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed in the normal state. , The third symbol in the final display is erased only when the notification image 750 is displayed during the final display. That is, the notification image 750 is displayed in preference to the third symbol only when the time effect, which is a characteristic effect of the pachinko machine 10, is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to overlook the stop symbol of the third symbol in the normal state, and to clearly display the time effect during the time effect.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a case where the time production is started 5 seconds before the start of the demonstration production. In the demonstration production of the present embodiment, the boy character 760 with a headband, which is normally displayed in the small area Ds2, is displayed on the entire third symbol display device 81, and is referred to as the model name "Pachinko machine 10". Character 770 is configured to be displayed in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm. The image displayed during the demonstration effect is not limited to this, and the name of the manufacturer that developed the pachinko machine 10 or the image of the character displayed during the time effect may be displayed. By executing this demonstration effect, it is possible to easily identify that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

As shown in FIG. 7, when 5 seconds before the time production during the demonstration production, the characters "contact time 5 seconds before" are displayed in the small area Ds3 720. The number of seconds of this character 720 is counted down until the time production is started. Then, when the start timing of the time effect is reached with the demo effect, the dog character 740 is displayed in the small area Ds2 as in the case of the start timing of the time effect during the final display of the third symbol. The character 720 "contact time 0 seconds before" is displayed in the small area Ds3, and the character "contact time has entered !!" is further displayed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6B). That is, the image of the demonstration effect (the boy's character 760 with a headband and the character 770 displaying the model name) that was normally executed is not displayed. Even if the execution period of the time effect is reached, if the image of the demo effect that is normally displayed is continuously displayed, it becomes difficult to determine from the displayed contents whether or not the time effect has been started. It ends up. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the image of the demo effect is deleted at the start of the time effect, the notification image 750 can be displayed without being blocked by the image of the demo effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player who has been trying to start the game after the time production recognize the timing to start the game.

Next, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the time production will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. As described above, this time effect is a special effect that is performed every hour for only 3 minutes. During this time production, the production in which the dog character 740 performs various actions is executed. When the time effect is started and the display period (5 seconds) of the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) ends, the display mode is switched to the display mode shown in FIG. 8A. That is, the main display area Dm on which the third symbol is displayed is reduced to the small display area 780 in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the variable effect and the final display effect are displayed in the small display area 780). The dog character 740 is displayed in the other area. Further, in the upper right portion of the third symbol display device 81, the remaining time until the time effect is completed is displayed. Here, after the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is displayed for 5 seconds, the display mode is switched to the display mode shown in FIG. 8A, so that the remaining time is displayed from 2 minutes 55 seconds to 0. Updated in the range of minutes 00 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 8A, when the time effect is started, the dog character 740 is displayed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. As the operation performed by the dog character 740, for example, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), the dog character 740 approaches the front side of the front view and looks at the player, or in FIG. 9 (a). As shown in the above, the dog character 740 is patted on the head to rejoice, and as shown in FIG. 9B, the dog character 740 is laid down, and the like is performed over time.

In this way, by displaying the effect of the lovely dog character 740 performing various actions, it is possible to give the player a feeling of healing, a favorable feeling, and the like. That is, it is possible to make the dog character 740 want to keep watching for a longer time. Therefore, even after the lapse of 3 minutes, which is the effect period of the time effect, the game can be continued until the next time effect by making the dog character 740 want to see various movements again. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, by limiting the effect in which the dog character 740 appears to 3 minutes in 1 hour, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting tired of the time effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more enjoyable during the time production, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The mode of the time production is not limited to the mode of the present embodiment, and the production content may be arbitrarily determined as long as the production is configured to be executed in a special mode different from the normal time. Good. For example, the display mode of the third symbol may be changed instead of the character. Further, as the time effect, it may be configured to execute a sound effect or a lamp effect different from the usual one. Further, as the time effect, a special effect different from the case of a big hit in the normal time may be performed by making a big hit during the time effect period.

In the present embodiment, the final display effect is reduced to the small display area 780 in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81 during the time effect, but the display is limited to this. is not. For example, the final display effect may not be displayed during the time effect. That is, the variation effect may be completed, the third symbol may be stopped and displayed for one second, and then the third symbol may be erased. Then, the image at the time of time production may be displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 including the small display area 780. As a result, the display area of the time effect can be expanded until the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the variable effect is started, so that the degree of freedom of the effect content can be further increased. it can. Therefore, the player can more enjoy the time effect, which is a characteristic effect of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. Further, for the same reason, the demo effect may not be displayed during the time effect.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not a lottery of ordinary symbols performed when the ball passes through the second entry port 67 is being executed by a lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 operates for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, a ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit and displayed by the second symbol hold lamp 84. To. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and the number of times the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more, as in the case of the first ball opening 64. It may be set to (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first ball entry port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entry port switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (16 rounds of jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 10). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, and a random number table 202c per second as part of the fixed value data described above. , And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. Details will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1, but the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting prize is any determination value specified in the first random number table 202a. If it matches, it is determined that it is a big hit of a special symbol.

The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 11B) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is set to each jackpot type. It is specified in association with each other. Specifically, the jackpot A is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49" (see 202b1 in FIG. 11B). Further, the jackpot B is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99" (see 202b2 in FIG. 11B). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 11 (c)) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5-28" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 11 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 11 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal entry port 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is used. It is judged whether or not it is a hit.

The variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 12, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 31). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 31).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set. When it matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The first random number table (not shown) for the high probability of the special symbol and the first random number table (not shown) for the low probability of the special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided in.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol at the time of low probability of the special symbol, and the random number value "7" is the first random number table 202a for the low probability. It is stored in. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/300".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a special symbol, there are 10 random numbers that are big hits for the special symbol, and the values "4,38,64,99,122,151,183,218,249,270" are It is stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/30".

In this embodiment, a random number value that is a big hit stored in the first hit random number table for low probability and a random number value that is a big hit stored in the first random number table for high probability. So, the random number values that are the jackpots for each are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that is the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 11B, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that three types of hit types (big hit A, big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. From the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2, the random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol is as shown below, according to the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 11B). It is set.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "Reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" and "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 31) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Has been done.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, as fluctuation patterns for deviation, "complete deviation" with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds, "disengagement short reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds, and "disengagement long reach" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds are displayed. , "Out of super reach" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified, and as a fluctuation pattern shared by jackpot A and jackpot B, "hit short reach" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds and "hit long reach" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds are specified. , "Hit super reach" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type). The types of fluctuation patterns are not limited to these, and a common fluctuation pattern may be provided for jackpot and miss. This makes it difficult to predict the jackpot type from the mode of the fluctuation pattern, so that the result of the fluctuation pattern can be watched more interestingly. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, a fluctuation pattern dedicated to jackpot A, which is most advantageous for the player, may be provided. As a result, the player who recognizes that the fluctuation pattern is dedicated to the jackpot A can be made to recognize that the third symbol is the jackpot A before the stop display is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. When this is done, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. Further, the second random number table 202c is used for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability time (normal symbol) with a higher probability of hitting a normal symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which the time is shortened), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 11 (c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation display of is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first ball opening 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. , The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation display of is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the first ball opening 64 is released. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first ball opening 64 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 31).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 12, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 31) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 30) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 29) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a probability variation flag. It has a 203e and a time-saving and medium-time counter 203f.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number counter C1 per first. , Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a shifts to the execution area. Then, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, a big hit lottery of the original special symbol is drawn. Apart from that, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the starting prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) is obtained. It is described that the prediction is to pre-read the lottery result of the special symbol thereafter. In addition, as various information, whether it is right or wrong, the type of stop, the fluctuation pattern, and the like are applicable.

Then, when the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, stop type, and fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. Store in 223a.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas The shift process is performed to pack the data into the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S404 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 24).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 24 and S405 in FIG. 26). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d determines the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the second entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 27).

When a ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variation display in the normal symbol M) is less than 4, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not done (S603: No in FIG. 28).

The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol), and if the value of the probability variation flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates that the special symbol is in a probabilistic state. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial state of the probability change flag 203e is set to off, and is set to on each time the end timing of "big hit A" is reached. On the other hand, the probability change flag 203e is turned off every time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off or the start of the jackpot is set.

When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 25) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the probability variation flag 203e is referred to, and if the state is on, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table for high probability. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag 203e is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table for the low probability time (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 25).

The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction / medium counter 203f is set to zero, and a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and 100 is set to that value each time a “big hit B” is obtained. That is, when the "big hit B" is reached, a new 100 value is set regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f (see S1013 in FIG. 32). After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variation effect of the special symbol is completed until the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f becomes 0 (S215 in FIG. 24).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the lottery for the normal symbol is performed based on the second random number table for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the second random number table for the low probability time (see S510 and S511 in FIG. 22).

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of a specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 29) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 228, an RTC 292, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 228, and when the frame button 228 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

At least the fluctuation pattern table 222a and the time effect table 222b are stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The variation pattern table 222a is referred to for selecting a detailed aspect of the variation effect (variation display) based on the mode of the rough variation effect (variation display) notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110. It's a table. A display variation pattern command is set based on the variation effect mode selected from the variation pattern table 222a (see S1704 in FIG. 39).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time is timed (measured) by the RTC292. Then, based on the time information (timekeeping information) of the RTC 292, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute the time effect every fixed time (for example, 1 hour) elapses. In the variation pattern table 222a of the present embodiment, different modes of variation effect are defined depending on the time-related conditions such as whether or not the time effect is in progress.

The details of the fluctuation pattern table 222a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the variation pattern table 222a. As shown in FIG. 13, in the variation pattern table 222a, detailed embodiments of selectable variation patterns (variation effects) are defined for each variation display mode (variation type) notified from the main control device 110. There is. Further, in the present embodiment, the mode of the changeable pattern that can be selected differs depending on the remaining period t until the time production is started. That is, a mode of variation effect is defined so as not to shield the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) in association with the value of the remaining time t.

Specifically, for example, when the fluctuation type notified by the fluctuation pattern command is completely out of order, and the remaining period (t) until the time production is started is 9 seconds or more (that is, 8 seconds). When the variation display corresponding to the complete deviation is completed and the time effect is not started before the third symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second), the variation effect in the normal mode corresponding to the complete deviation (Fig. 4 (b)). ) Is selected (see 222a1 in FIG. 13). This is because the start time of the time effect and the fluctuation period do not overlap, so that it is not necessary to reduce or make the third symbol transparent.

If the remaining period (t) until the time production is started is 2 seconds or more and less than 9 seconds (that is, the period of 5 seconds when the notification image 750 is displayed and the third symbol are displayed. (If it overlaps with the one second that is stopped and displayed), a variation effect is selected in which the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81 (see 222a2 in FIG. 13). ). As a result, the variation effect can be displayed without shielding the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B). Therefore, while displaying the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the time production has started.

When the remaining period (t) until the time production is started is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds (that is, the period of 5 seconds when the notification image 750 is displayed is the third symbol. (If it overlaps with the variable display period), the changing third symbol is displayed in a semi-transparent manner (see 222a3 in FIG. 13). That is, the variable display is executed in the mode shown in FIG. 5 (b). By displaying the third symbol in a semi-transparent manner in a semi-transparent manner, it is possible to prevent the characters "contact time rush !!" displayed during the variable display from disappearing. Therefore, the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) can be clearly recognized by the player.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to display the third symbol as usual (not in a semi-transparent mode) for 1 second after the start of fluctuation and 1 second before the stop of fluctuation. This is because if the third symbol is made translucent during the entire period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation, the player may not be able to recognize that the fluctuation display has started or that the fluctuation display has ended. is there. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation is started, the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is increased, and the third symbol is in a translucent mode from the time when the fluctuation speed of the symbol becomes sufficiently high for 1 second. .. Further, in 1 second before the end of the fluctuation, the display mode of the third symbol is returned to the normal mode (non-translucent mode), and the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is slowed down. As a result, the player can be surely recognized the start of the fluctuation and the end of the fluctuation. Further, since the third symbol is in a translucent mode while the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is high (that is, a period in which it is difficult to visually recognize the third symbol), the third symbol becomes translucent. This can be made difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by switching the display mode of the third symbol.

If the remaining period (t) until the time effect is started is less than 1 second, or if the time effect is already in progress, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81. (See 222a4 in FIG. 13). As a result, it is possible to prevent the movements of the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) and the dog character 740 displayed during the time production from being blocked by the variable display of the third symbol.

Even when the variation type is out of line and short reach, the mode of the variation effect is selected according to the remaining time (t) until the time effect is started. That is, if the remaining period (t) until the time effect is started is 16 seconds or more and the time effect is not started during the variable display corresponding to the short reach, the third symbol is displayed in the normal display mode. The variable effect to be performed is selected (see 222a5 in FIG. 13).

If the remaining period (t) until the start of the time effect is 2 seconds or more and less than 16 seconds, the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is displayed for a period of 5 seconds. And 1 second when the third symbol is stopped and displayed overlaps, so a variation effect of a mode in which the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81 is selected (FIG. See 222a6 of 13).

If the remaining period (t) until the time production is started is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds (that is, the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is displayed for 5 seconds). (If the period of 3 overlaps with the variable display period of the 3rd symbol), the changing 3rd symbol is displayed in a semi-transparent manner (see 222a7 in FIG. 13). As a result, the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) can be clearly recognized by the player (see FIG. 5B).

If the remaining period (t) until the time effect is started is less than 1 second, or if the time effect is already in progress, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81. The variable effect of the mode of variable display is selected (see 222a8 in FIG. 13). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the movements of the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) and the dog character 740 displayed during the time production from being blocked by the variable display of the third symbol. it can.

Further, when the variation type is a hit short reach, it is out of the question whether the normal aspect is selected as the variation effect mode, the reduced display mode is selected, or the translucent mode is selected. Judgment is based on the same criteria as short reach. That is, if the remaining period (t) until the time effect is started is 16 seconds or more, the variable effect in which the third symbol is displayed in the normal display mode is selected (see 222a9 in FIG. 13). If the remaining period (t) until the start of the time effect is 2 seconds or more and less than 16 seconds, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81. A variable effect of the mode of variable display is selected (see 222a10 in FIG. 13). Further, when the remaining period (t) until the time production is started is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, the changing third symbol is displayed in a semi-transparent manner (222a11 in FIG. 13). reference). If the remaining period (t) until the time effect is started is less than 1 second, or if the time effect is already in progress, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81. (See 222a12 in FIG. 13). Since the fluctuation time is the same for the off-short reach and the hit short reach, the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is clearly displayed by selecting the mode of the variation effect based on the same criteria as the out-of-short reach. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the start of the time production.

Although not shown, the remaining time (t) until the start of the time production is also used for other variable types (long reach, hit long reach, miss super reach, hit super reach). Different modes of variable effect are specified in. As a result, a mode that does not interfere with the display of the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is selected regardless of which variation effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player aware that the time production has started.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The time effect table 222b is a data table in which the execution period of the normal effect and the execution period of the time effect are defined in association with the elapsed time from turning on the power. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to determine the elapsed time since the pachinko machine 10 is turned on based on the time information (timekeeping information) of the RTC292. Based on the value of the elapsed time and the specified contents of the time effect table 222b, it is determined whether the effect mode is the normal effect mode or the time effect mode.

The determination of the effect mode is performed in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 of FIG. 35) of the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the determination value of the time effect table 222b shown in FIG. , The effect mode is specified according to the elapsed time T (see S1402 in FIG. 36) determined based on the time information (timekeeping information) of RTC292 (see S1403 in FIG. 36).

The details of the time effect table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the time effect table 222b stored in the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 14, in the time effect table 222b, the power was turned on to the game machine depending on whether it was the execution period of the normal effect (normal effect period) or the execution period of the time effect (time effect period). It is defined in association with the value of the later elapsed time T.

As shown in FIG. 14, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on within 60 minutes, it is a normal production period (see 222b1 in FIG. 14), and 3 minutes after 60 minutes have passed is regarded as a time production period. (See 222b2 in FIG. 14). Then, after the lapse of 3 minutes, which is the time production period, the normal production period is set again (see 222b3 in FIG. 14), and the normal production period continues for 57 minutes. After that, the time production period of 3 minutes and the normal production period of 57 minutes are alternately repeated.

In this way, except for 60 minutes immediately after the power is turned on, if the game is played for one hour, the game always switches to a different production period. Therefore, the player can feel the novelty by switching the production period. Therefore, even if the game is played for a long time, only the same effect is generated, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game. Further, since the special production period of 3 minutes and the normal production period of 57 minutes are periodically repeated, the player can easily grasp the time zone of the time production period and the time zone of the normal production period. .. Therefore, it is possible to start the game for each player aiming at the production period in which the production of the production mode suitable for his / her taste is performed, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Although the correspondence between the elapsed time T and the production period when the elapsed time T is 180 minutes or later is omitted in FIG. 14, in reality, even after 180 minutes, the special production period of 3 minutes and 57 minutes are shown. It is set so that the normal production period of is repeated alternately. The range of the elapsed time T in the time effect table 222b needs to be set at least for the business hours of one day of the hall. For example, the elapsed time T and the effect are produced in the range of less than 1440 minutes (24 hours). The correspondence with the period may be set, or the correspondence with several days may be set. Further, the types of the effect period are not necessarily limited to the two types of the normal effect period and the time effect period, and three or more types of effect periods in which the modes of the effect to be executed are different from each other may be provided.

Further, although the present embodiment defines a table in which the type of the effect period is specified for each value of the elapsed time T, it is not always necessary to prepare a table corresponding to all the values of T. For example, the range of the value of the elapsed time T, which is the normal effect period, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T, which is the time effect period, are defined one by one, and the value of the elapsed time T is defined. When it is out of the range, a predetermined value may be added to the specified range of the value of the elapsed time T. As a specific example, for example, the range of the value of the elapsed time T which is the normal effect period is 0 minutes 00 seconds to 57:00, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T which is the time effect period is 57:00 to 60 minutes. It is defined as 00 seconds, and when the value of the elapsed time T reaches 60 minutes 00 seconds, the range of the value of the elapsed time T which is the normal production period and the range of the value of the elapsed time T which is the special production period. 60 minutes 00 seconds may be added to each, and control may be performed so as to reset the type of the effect period in the range of the value of the elapsed time T from 60 minutes 00 seconds to 120 minutes 00 seconds.

More specifically, in the time effect table 222b, the range of the value of the elapsed time T which is the normal effect period is 0 minutes 00 seconds to 57:00 seconds, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T which is the time effect period is Only the information that it is 57:00 to 60 minutes is specified. Then, based on the power-on, the information defined in the time effect table 222b is duplicated in a predetermined area of the RAM 223, and the type of the effect period is determined based on the duplicated information. Then, when the elapsed time T reaches 60 minutes 00 seconds, which is the maximum value of the elapsed time T specified in the duplicated information, 6 minutes 00 seconds is added to the duplicated information to make a new value. Update to information. That is, the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the normal production period is 60 minutes 00 seconds to 117 minutes 00 seconds, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the special production period is 117 minutes 00 seconds to 120 minutes 00 seconds. It is updated with the information that there is. After that, every time 60 minutes and 00 seconds elapse, it is controlled to add 60 minutes and 00 seconds to the duplicated information and update it with new information, and the production period is based on the updated information and the elapsed time T. Determine the type of.

In this case, since the amount of data in the time effect table 222b is reduced, the capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced. Therefore, the price of ROM 222 can be reduced.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, an input time storage area 223e, and a time production flag 223f. And at least are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and the winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in response to the start prize when the main control device 110 wins the start. Therefore, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the ball into the first entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variation display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1508 in FIG. 37). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved spheres on which the variable display is held.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1502 in FIG. 37), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1702 in FIG. 39). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1505 in FIG. 37), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1707 in FIG. 39). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type) is set.

The on-time storage area 223e is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the power-on time of the pachinko machine 10, and when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the time information (timekeeping information) of the RTC 292 is stored. To. Specifically, the current time information (timekeeping information) acquired from RTC292 is stored in the time setting process (see S1114 in FIG. 33) of the start-up process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. The stored timekeeping information is used to calculate the elapsed time T from the power-on in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 in FIG. 35) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 during the normal production period. It is used to determine whether there is a time production period (see S1404 in FIG. 36). Since the contents stored in the RAM 223 are not backed up, the timekeeping information stored in the on-time storage area 223e is lost when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type of the effect period is determined based on the time information acquired from the RTC292 during the start-up process (see FIG. 33) and stored in the input time storage area 223e. If the timing at which the start-up process (see FIG. 33) is performed in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is matched, the timing at which the time information is stored in the input time storage area 223e of each pachinko machine 10 can also be matched. If the timing at which the time information is stored in the input time storage area 223e is matched, the elapsed time T calculated in the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) in each pachinko machine 10 can also be adjusted, so that the elapsed time can be adjusted. It is possible to match the timing of switching from the normal effect period to the time effect period based on T and the timing of switching from the time effect period to the normal effect period based on the elapsed time T. As a result, the persons involved in the hall can align the production period of each pachinko machine 10 simply by turning on the power of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 all at once. Therefore, some pachinko machines 10 have a normal production period, and other pachinko machines 10 have a time production period, so that the player playing the game can perform the production in a different production mode from the other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to prevent (suppress) feeling uncomfortable with what is being done. As a method of turning on the power to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the same time, for example, an island composed of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is provided, and an external power source capable of turning on the power for each island is provided. It should be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time is determined from the time information of RTC292, and the type of the production period is not switched according to the time zone, but the time information acquired at the time of the start-up process and the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311). The elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired in the above, and the type of the effect period is determined based on the elapsed time T. As a result, even if the time information of the RTC292 of each pachinko machine 10 is deviated from each other due to aged deterioration or the like, the deviated timekeeping information is not directly used for determining the type of the production period, but is called the elapsed time T. Since it can be converted into a relative value and used for determining the type of production period, the influence of deviation can be reduced. Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to match the timing of switching from the normal effect period to the special effect period based on the elapsed time T and the timing of switching from the special effect period to the normal effect period based on the elapsed time T. Therefore, since the production period of each pachinko machine 10 can be aligned, some pachinko machines 10 have a normal production period, and other pachinko machines 10 have a time production period, so that the player playing the game can play the game. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from feeling uncomfortable when the production is performed in a different production mode from that of the other pachinko machines 10.

The time effect flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the current effect period is a special effect period. The time effect flag 223f is normally produced based on the time effect table 222b (see FIG. 14) in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 of FIG. 35) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is turned on when it is determined that the period is switched to the time production period (see S1409 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, it is turned off when it is determined that the special effect period is switched to the time effect period based on the time effect table 222b (see S1406 in FIG. 36). Further, the time effect flag 223f is also turned off when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

When the time effect flag 223f is turned on, a rear image change command corresponding to the time effect is set (see S1410 in FIG. 36), so that the time effect is supported based on receiving the back image change command. The back image is displayed. On the other hand, when the time effect flag 223f is turned off, the rear image change command corresponding to the normal back surface (rear surface A) is set, so that the normal effect is supported based on receiving the rear image change command. The rear image (rear surface A) is displayed (see S1407 in FIG. 36).

As described above, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As the rear image displayed during the time production, for example, the notification image 750 shown in FIG. 6 (b) (see FIG. 6 (b)) and the image of the dog character 740 shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 are used. Can be mentioned. Then, the time effect continues until the display control device 114 receives the rear image change command (see S1407 in FIG. 36) that is output based on the time effect flag 223f being turned off.

If a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are installed side by side (in an island) in the hall, the production mode of the effect executed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10 constituting the island can be set in the time zone. It is possible to switch to different production modes all at once (island interlocking). By interlocking with the islands, different modes of production are executed according to the timing of the game, so that each player can produce a production mode (normal production or time production) that suits his or her own taste. The game can be started at the timing when it is performed. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type of the production period is switched according to the elapsed time, but the islands may be linked according to the day of the week, the date, the season, and the like.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 37) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 29).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

The RTC 292 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and is composed of a real-time clock capable of measuring the current time. The electrical configuration of the RTC292 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RTC292. The RTC 292 has an input / output port 350, a device control unit 351 and a register 352. Further, an RTC power supply 353 is connected to the RTC 292. The RTC power supply 353 is a power supply dedicated to the RTC 292, which is different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC 292 even when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. As the RTC power supply 353, for example, a button type battery is used.

An input / output port 350 and a register 352 are connected to the device control unit 351 of the RTC 292. The input / output port 350 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 so as to be able to communicate with each other. The device control unit 351 controls the register 352 to perform various controls such as measuring the current time and writing data.

The register 352 is a storage area in which data can be temporarily stored and operations can be performed on the stored data. As shown in FIG. 15, the register 352 is provided with at least a timekeeping register 352a and a time information storage area 352b.

The timekeeping register 352a is a register for measuring the current time, and the register value is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 1/4096 seconds). Based on the timekeeping information measured in the timekeeping register 352a, it is determined whether or not it is the execution period of the time effect.

The time information storage area 352b is a storage area where timekeeping information can be written and the stored information can be overwritten. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (when there is information on the occurrence of the power off), the timekeeping information acquired at the time of turning on the power stored in the ON time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 is written. Is done. As described above, since the RTC 292 is supplied with power from the RTC power supply 353, which is independent of the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, the timekeeping information at the time of power-on is retained even while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. be able to. Therefore, for example, even when the power supply of a part of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is cut off during the game, the timekeeping information stored in the time information storage area 352b when the power is restored can be stored in the input time storage area 223e. it can. That is, it is possible to determine whether or not the time effect is executed based on the same timekeeping information as that of the other pachinko machine 10 whose power supply is not cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from which the power supply is cut off and the other pachinko machine 10 from shifting the execution timing of the time effect.

In this embodiment, the value of the timekeeping register 352a (corresponding to the current time measured by the RTC292) with respect to the ON time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 based on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the power is turned on. It is configured to determine whether to store the timekeeping information) or the timekeeping information stored in the time information storage area 352b. That is, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, the time information stored in the time information storage area 352b is stored in the turn-on time storage area 223e. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM erase switch 122, the value of the timekeeping register 352a (timekeeping information corresponding to the current time measured by RTC292) is stored in the turn-on time storage area 223e. ing.

As a result, the clerk in the hall turns on the power all at once without pressing the RAM erase switch 122 of each pachinko machine 10 at the opening time of the hall or the like, so that the elapsed time from the power on that each pachinko machine 10 grasps. Can be matched. Therefore, in each pachinko machine 10, the execution period of the time effect can be matched. On the other hand, when the power of some pachinko machines 10 is cut off during the business hours of the hall (for example, when canceling an error), when the power is turned on again, the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the timekeeping information stored in the time information storage area 352b can be stored in the turn-on time storage area 223e. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from which the power supply is cut off and the other pachinko machine 10 from shifting the execution timing of the time effect.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since some models have exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made available in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d, or a control program thereof. Fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 or the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to transfer to the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 40) executed after the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 40) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 22) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and draws one frame of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237, so that the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b and the third symbol area 235d when the power is turned on are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 by the fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 40). The main image at power-on is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on, while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. The amount of data is smaller than the image displayed during a normal game, and the image is simple. Therefore, the image data can be quickly transferred and the image can be displayed after the power is turned on.

When the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control unit 110, which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, while the main image is being turned on, the display control device 114 Is on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, the variable image when the power is turned on with the "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol when the power is turned on. The variable image and the variable image are displayed alternately and repeatedly during the variable period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the "x" symbol is displayed after the variable effect is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by power-on. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. 18 and 19 are explanatory views for explaining the three types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. 18A is shown in FIG. 18 (b) is for the back surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and FIG. 19 is for the back surface C corresponding to the “island stage”. They are shown below.

Of the back surfaces A to C, as shown in FIG. 18, the rear image corresponding to the back surfaces A and B is a character whose image is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is prepared in ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, so that the third symbol display device 81 smoothly displays the image. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the frame button 228 is operated by the player to change the stage to "city stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 first positions the display area between position a and position a'in the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, the rear image on the back surface C has a third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 19 with the passage of time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, on the back surface C, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage" by the operation of the frame button 228 by the player, the rear image shown in FIG. 19A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 19A, an orange sky indicating a sunrise is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the back image shown in FIG. 19B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 19B, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the lapse of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 19C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 19C, a black sky indicating the night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the image returns to the back image shown in FIG. 19A, and the back images of FIGS. 19A to 19C are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 18A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often performed without changing the stage while displaying the city stage, which is the initial stage, so all the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed city stage is displayed in the back image area. By making the character ROM 234 resident, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18B, the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage contains only a part of the back surface area, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, for the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the back image area 235c of. Further, the back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 19 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (b) excluding FIG. 19 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 228 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the intention of the player, even if the frame button 228 is operated at an arbitrary timing In order to change the back image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the back images, but doing so makes the resident video RAM 235 very much. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a'or the range of FIGS. 19A to 19B. It is fixed, and the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position or the image between FIGS. 19A to 19B is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 228 by the player. By using the image data resident in 235c, the initial positions of the back surface B and the back surface C can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone is changed with the passage of time. Can be displayed while. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surface B and the back surface C, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from position b'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from position a to position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface C, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 19 (a), so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 19 (b) to 19 (c) and 19 (c) to (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 19 (b) to (c) and 19 (c) to (a) is normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 19A to 19B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 19 (b) to (c) and 19 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. be able to.

On the back surface B and the back surface C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 16) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area by using the image data of the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which it is not performed.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed of DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table and display data in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , A display data table corresponding to round effect, ending effect, final display effect, and demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening production is a production for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, and the round production will be from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state. In the final display effect, if the holding ball does not exist after the variation effect is completed (that is, when the next variation effect is not started), the third symbol that is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the completed variation effect is stopped as it is. It is a production that keeps displaying. This final display effect continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first ball entry port 64. By displaying the definite display effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the lottery condition for the special symbol has not been satisfied, so that the ball can be launched aiming at the first entry port 64. As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variation effect was stopped. Therefore, the rear image changes as the third symbol disappears (see FIG. 7). If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, display data tables corresponding to the variation effect, the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, the final display effect, and the demo effect are stored. The details of the data table storage area 233b will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing data stored in the data table storage area 233b. The data table storage area 233b is provided with a storage area for storing data tables corresponding to each effect (variable effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect, final display effect, and demo effect).

As shown in FIG. 17, in the area for storing the data table corresponding to the variation effect (variation effect table storage area), a display data table corresponding to various variation effects in a normal mode and (see 233b1 in FIG. 17). A display data table corresponding to various variation effects in a reduced display and variable display mode (see 233b2 in FIG. 17), and a display data table corresponding to various variation effects in a semi-transparent mode (see FIG. 17). 233b3)) are stored respectively. As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 calculates the remaining time (t) until the time effect is started based on the timekeeping information measured by the RTC292. .. Then, according to the remaining time (t), the mode of the variation effect that does not interfere with the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is determined, and the determined variation effect mode is determined by the display variation pattern command. It is configured to notify the display control device 114. In the variation effect table storage area, display data tables corresponding to all modes of variation effect that can be notified by this display variation pattern command are stored.

In addition, in the opening production table storage area, it is executed to notify the player that a big hit has occurred at the start of the special game state (big hit state) that shifts when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. It is configured to store the display data table corresponding to the opening effect to be performed (see 233b4 in FIG. 17). As the display data table corresponding to the opening effect, for example, a different display data table is selected according to the jackpot type (that is, a plurality of display data tables are provided, and an opening effect having a different display mode depending on the jackpot type is provided. Is selected). As a result, the effects of different modes are displayed according to the type of jackpot, so that the effects can be diversified, and the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, as a display data table corresponding to the opening effect, only one type of table that is commonly used for all jackpots may be provided. As a result, the amount of data in the work RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 can be reduced.

In the round effect table storage area, a display data table corresponding to the round effect displayed during each round of the jackpot is stored (see 233b5 in FIG. 17). Further, in the ending effect table storage area, a display data table corresponding to the ending effect displayed to notify the player of the end of the jackpot is stored (see 233b6 in FIG. 17).

In the confirmation display effect table storage area, there is a display data table corresponding to the effect of displaying the third symbol in a normal manner (see 233b7 in FIG. 17), and the third symbol is displayed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81. A display data table and (see 233b8 in FIG. 17) corresponding to the effect of the mode of displaying in a reduced size are stored. A display data table of any aspect is selected and set depending on whether or not the timing for starting the final display effect is during the time effect period.

In the demo production table storage area, a display data table corresponding to the demo production for the normal production period (see 233b9 in FIG. 17) and a display data table corresponding to the demo production for the time production period (233b10 in FIG. 17). See) is stored. As the display data table corresponding to the demo effect for the time effect period, for example, a display data table in which no demo image is specified is stored. That is, if the start timing of the time production is reached during the demo production, or if the start condition of the demo production is satisfied during the time production, the demo image is not displayed (that is, the back image for the time production becomes the demo image. Since it is not hidden), the time effect can be displayed using the full screen of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the degree of freedom in time production can be further increased.

The mode of the demo effect executed during the time effect is not limited to this, and if the mode can prevent the image of the time effect from being blocked by the demo effect, the demo image is displayed. May be good. For example, the demo effect may be displayed only in the small display area 780 (see FIG. 8A) in which the variation effect is reduced and displayed during the time effect. Further, a display area having a display area smaller than that of the small display area 780 may be provided, and the demo effect may be displayed in the display area. Further, for example, the demo effect itself may be configured not to be performed, and the final display may be continued. That is, when the holding ball does not exist when the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped, the stopped symbol is reduced to the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81 unless there is a new entry into the first entry port 64. It may be configured to continue to be displayed in the embodiment. As a result, it is possible to clearly display the effect during the time effect. Therefore, even if a demonstration effect is performed in a hall or the like where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed side by side, it is possible to perform a unified effect by displaying the time effect all at once.

In this way, since the display data table corresponding to all of the various display effects instructed to be executed by the voice lamp control device 113 is stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is a voice lamp. A wide variety of display effects can be easily executed simply by selecting and setting the display data table corresponding to the command output from the control device 113 from the data table storage area 233b.

Next, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by one unit of the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81. The contents (drawing contents) of the image for one frame are defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a boy image and a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backs A to. Information for specifying whether to display a back image different from C (for example, an image corresponding to time production) is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 20). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 22) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of program activation and execution, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration can be realized only based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, is resident among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 21). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 21).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 21, in the example of FIG. 21). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 22) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 21, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is displayed. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the above-mentioned power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 sets it on in the main process (see FIG. 40) (see S1805 in FIG. 40). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S3605 in FIG. 54 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 42B), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 42B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 42B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 42 (b) see S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 43 to 48) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 49 to 53) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3501 in FIG. 54 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 22) described later, which describes the drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 22) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 42 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 49) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 22) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 22, a back image and a third symbol (designs 1,) used in the image of one frame. Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image and the warning image notifying the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transferred data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 42 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 49). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3713 in FIG. 55). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3514 in FIG. 55). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3802 in FIG. 56).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 42B) is executed, it is performed (see S3802 in FIG. 56).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 23 to 32. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then, The start winning process associated with the winning of the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate is passed along with the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67. The process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 31) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, the display content of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 25. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S212). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of a special symbol (S212: Yes), the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S213), and this process ends. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S213, when the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 31), it branches to S1001: Yes and the opening command. Is set. As a result, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the process of S213, the probability variation flag 203e is set to off, or the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is set to 0. This is to make the state during the jackpot the same as the initial state.

In the processing of S212, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S214), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1. If the above is the case (S214: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S215), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S214: No), the processing of S215 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 24) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol miss" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are used. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect to be performed.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probability change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol. If the probability change flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, and the probability change When the flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol.

When the probability change flag 203e is on (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, so that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the first value for high probability. Based on the random number table per unit, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values stored in the first random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "4,38,64,99,122,151,183,218,249,270" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the first random number is set. When the value of the counter C1 and the random number value that is the hit of these match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the probability variation flag 203e is off (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, so that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 is used. , The lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the first random number table for the low probability time (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table for low probability. “7” is set as the random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and “7” match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols (big hit A). , Jackpot B), determine what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16 round probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined. It is determined that the jackpot is B (16-round time-saving jackpot) (see FIG. 11B).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

For example, "completely off", "out of short reach", "out of long reach", and "out of super reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns for loss, and "hits" are defined as fluctuation patterns shared by jackpot A and jackpot B. Various types of "short reach", "hit long reach", and "hit super reach" are stipulated.

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To determine.

When the process of S307 or the process of S39 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 31). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S312 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and when there is a starting winning. , The process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the process for pre-reading the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 31) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the processing of S406, the winning / failing of the lottery in the special symbol (whether it is a big hit or not), the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S407).

If the winning / failing of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S407, then the predicted winning / failing of the lottery, the predicted stopping type, and A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S408), and this process is terminated.

The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 31) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as the winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S107). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entry port 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S501). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is performed while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit. Includes during and during. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S501: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is larger than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S508). The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of a special symbol (S509). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first entry opening 64 is released. This is to prevent the ball that is to be won in the specific winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first entry opening 64 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the first one Many balls enter the ball entry port 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the processing of S509, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 11 (c)).

In the process of S508, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S508: No), the process proceeds to the process of S511. In the processing of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 is low. Based on the second hit random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 11 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S512), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S512: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S514), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S514: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. Whether or not it is determined (S515). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S515, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so that the first ball entrance The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to the process of S517. In the processing of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is set to 0. . Set to 2 seconds, set the number of times of opening to 1 (S517), and shift to the process of S519.

In the process of S512, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S512: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

In the process of S519, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S519), and if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S519: Yes), the variation in the second symbol display device 83. The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S519: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the first ball entry port 64 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S520 or the process of S521 before the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S522, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S522: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S522, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S518, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S523, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 31) is executed next. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S513 or the process of S518.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process a hit of the normal symbol? Is determined (S524). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 is set (S525), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 31) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S516 or the process of S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, and if the ball has passed, the ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S602). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

Whether the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entry port 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is added by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S605), and this process is terminated. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S701) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S802). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process shifts to S810. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is shifted to S810 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S810 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S914 of the main process (see FIG. 26), the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S810, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S810). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S811, S812) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S811, S812) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S811, S812) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S811, S812), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S811), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S812). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S813.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S813. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S813, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S814), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 24) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 26) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 26) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first ball entry port 64 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 27), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 25), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 25) ends, the first symbol display device The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 25) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 27), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 27), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 27) after ending the variable display (see FIG. 27). Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process is shifted to S901, and each process after S901 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S909: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process is executed. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the processing of S908, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 29 has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S914), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the information on the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can be started from the process of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack is used in the initial setting process (S801). By setting the pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S901 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, if the processing of S213 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 24) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1001, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001: Yes), the opening command is set (S1002), and this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1003). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. In the process of S1003, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1003: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1003, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1006). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls are formed. When a prize is won (for example, 10 pieces), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1007, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this processing is completed. To do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that the ending effect is started.

In the process of S1009, when it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: Yes), the ending command is set (S1010), and the present process is ended. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1009, if it is not the ending timing (S1009: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1011). In the processing of S1011, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is jackpot A (S1012), and if it is jackpot A (S1012). : Yes), in order to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot A, the probability variation flag 203e is set to ON (S1014), and the process shifts to S1015.

In the processing of S1012, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not the jackpot A (that is, the jackpot B), the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203f is set in order to shift to the time reduction state of the normal symbol after the end of the jackpot B. 100 is set (S1013), and the process shifts to S1015. In the process of S1015 executed after the process of S1013 or S1014, the end of the jackpot is set and the present process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: No), the present process is terminated as it is. By this jackpot control process (see FIG. 32), various settings related to jackpot can be made.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 39. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1101). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1318 (see FIG. 35) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1102). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power off command from the main control device 110 (see S1314 in FIG. 35), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power off process of S1318. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1102: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1318. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1103).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1106. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1103: Yes), the process proceeds to S1104 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1103: No), the process proceeds to S1108.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1103: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1104. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1318 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1103: No), and the data shifts to S1108.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1102: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process in S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1104 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1104, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1104). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1106). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1105: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1107), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S1108, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1108). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1318 is executed (see S1316 in FIG. 35). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1318 is executed, the process of S1108 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1109), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Permission is set (S1111). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

Next, the time setting process for storing the timekeeping information for determining the execution period of the time effect in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 is executed (S1112), and the process proceeds to the main process.

On the other hand, the process of S1108 is reached with the power off flag turned off because the start-up process of this time was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off, so that the process of S1108 via the processes of S1104 to S1106 was started. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1108: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1109, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1110, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1111), the time setting process is executed (S1112), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1109 is that when the processing of S1108 is reached via the processing of S1104 to S1106, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1104. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a time setting process (S1114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. This time setting process (S1114) is a process for storing the timekeeping information corresponding to the time when the power is turned on. The timekeeping information acquired by this process is used to determine the elapsed time from power-on in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 in FIG. 35) performed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113, which will be described later. Be done.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this time setting process (S1114). When the time setting process (S1114) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is turned on (S1201), and if it is turned on (S1201: Yes), the RTC292 The time information is read from the time information storage area 352b provided in the register 352 (S1202), and the process shifts to S1204.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1201 that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (that is, it is turned off) (S1201: No), the timekeeping information measured by the RTC292 is read from the timekeeping register 352a (S1203). , The process shifts to S1204. In the process of S1204, the time information read in the process of S1202 or the process of S1203 is stored in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 (S1205), and this process is terminated.

In this way, the time information (timekeeping information) for determining the type of the effect period is stored in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 by the start-up process, so that the power is turned on in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall. If the timing of the operation (that is, the start-up process is performed) is adjusted, the timing at which the time information is stored in the input time storage area 223e of each pachinko machine 10 can also be adjusted. If the timing at which the time information is stored in the input time storage area 223e is matched, the elapsed time T calculated in the elapsed time confirmation process (see FIG. 36) in each pachinko machine 10 can also be adjusted. It is possible to match the timing of switching from the normal effect period to the time effect period and the timing of switching from the time effect period to the normal effect period based on the elapsed time T. As a result, the persons concerned in the hall can arrange the production period of each pachinko machine 10 simply by turning on the power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall all at once. Therefore, since it is possible to display a unified effect on the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time is determined from the time information of RTC292, and the type of the production period is not switched according to the time zone, but the time information acquired at the time of the start-up process and the elapsed time confirmation process (FIG. 36). The elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired in (see), and the type of the effect period is determined based on the elapsed time T. As a result, even if the time information of the RTC292 of each pachinko machine 10 is deviated from each other due to aged deterioration or the like, the time information deviated from each other is not directly used for determining the type of the production period, but the elapsed time T. Since it can be converted into a relative value and used for determining the type of production period, the influence of deviation can be reduced. Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, the timing of switching from the normal effect period to the time effect period and the timing of switching from the time effect period to the normal effect period can be matched based on the elapsed time T. Therefore, since the production period of each pachinko machine 10 can be aligned, some pachinko machines 10 have a normal production period, and other pachinko machines 10 have a time production period, so that the player playing the game can play the game. It is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from feeling uncomfortable when the production is performed in a different production mode from that of the other pachinko machines 10.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, the time information stored in the time information storage area 352b stores the time information of the RAM. It is stored in the area 223f. Since the time information stored in the ON time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 is stored in the time information storage area 352b when the power is cut off (see S1317 in FIG. 35), the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. By doing so, the time information stored in the on-time storage area 223e when the power is cut off can be restored as it is.

As a result, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 needs to be replaced due to a failure, or when an on-site inspection is performed, it becomes necessary to turn off one pachinko machine 10 during business hours. However, only by turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 pressed, the time is stored in the ON time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 by the time acquisition process when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM erase switch 122 last time. The time information (timekeeping information) stored in the time information storage area 352b of the RTC 292 when the power is cut off can be stored again in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 223. Therefore, if the power is turned on all at once without pressing the RAM erasing switch 122 for the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall, then one pachinko machine 10 is turned off. However, by simply pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 10, the time information (timekeeping information) when the power is turned on all at once can be stored in the turn-on time storage area 223e. .. Therefore, the elapsed time T can be determined based on the same time information (timekeeping information) before and after the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to match the timing of switching from the normal production period to the time production period and the timing of switching from the time production period to the normal production period based on the same elapsed time T as that of other gaming machines, so that the power is cut off. Only the pachinko machine 10 can prevent the timing at which the production mode can be switched from shifting, and can perform a unified production during the time production period.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed in the time setting process (see FIG. 34), the time information stored in the time information storage area 352b of the RTC292 is stored. Although it is controlled to be read out (see S1202) and stored in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 (see S1205), the present invention is not limited to this form. For example, a switch means dedicated to the time acquisition process different from the RAM erase switch 122 is provided, and the time information storage area of the RTC292 is provided when the switch means is turned on in the time setting process (see FIG. 34). It may be configured to read the time information stored in 352b.

As a result, the time information stored in the time information storage area 352b of the RTC 292 can be stored in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 while retaining the information stored in the RAM 223 before the power failure state is set. .. Therefore, even if the holding ball is in the power-off state with the remaining ball remaining, or even if the power is cut off during the high-probability state of the special symbol, it remains based on the power-on again. Since it is possible to suppress the disappearance of the reserved ball or the transition from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, a certain magazine (suppression) that a disadvantage will occur to the player. can do.

Further, instead of using a switch means such as the RAM erase switch 122, when the time measured by the RTC292 is in a predetermined time zone, it is stored in the time information storage area 352b of the RTC292 based on the power-on of the pachinko machine 10. The time information may be read out and stored in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 223. Further, in a time zone other than the predetermined time zone, the time timing information measured by the RTC 292 is read from the time counting register 352a and stored in the ON time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 based on the power-on of the pachinko machine 10. May be good. In this case, as the predetermined time zone, the business hours of the hall may be set, for example, from 10:00 to 22:45.

With this configuration, the time information (timekeeping information) corresponding to the current time can be obtained by simply turning on the pachinko machines 10 all at once before the start of the predetermined time zone (before 10:00). ) Can be stored in the on-time storage area 223e of each pachinko machine 10, so that the elapsed time grasped by each pachinko machine 10 that has been turned on can be adjusted. Therefore, it is possible to match the production period of the time production. Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during a predetermined time zone (during the business period of the hall), it is stored in the ON time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 when the power is turned on all at once by simply turning on the power again. The time information (timekeeping information) that had been used can be restored. That is, the pachinko machine 10 in which the power supply is cut off and the pachinko machine 10 in which the power supply is not cut off can match the effect period of the time effect without performing a special operation such as pressing the RAM erase switch 122.

Therefore, the employee of the hall turns on the pachinko machine 10 which was turned off during business hours without turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 due to a mistake, so that the power is turned on again. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the elapsed time T from being stored in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 233 and being displaced from the other pachinko machines 10 that were not in the power failure state (preventing human error). it can). Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the timing at which the production period is switched between the pachinko machine 10 that has been turned off during business hours and the pachinko machine 10 that has not been turned off. Moreover, since no special operation is required, the labor of the hall employees can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S1301 was executed (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1312 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1311. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1302 to S1311 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1312 and the variation display setting process of S1313 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1313 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1313 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S1305 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 228 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 228 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 228 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 228 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 228 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 228 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 228 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 228 may be used as a decision button for selecting one reach effect from a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 228 is not arranged, the process of S1307 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S1310 is completed, the elapsed time confirmation process is executed (S1311). In this elapsed time confirmation process, the current production period is determined based on the time information (timekeeping information) of RTC292. The details of this elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

In the process of S1312, a command determination process that performs a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed (S1312). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1313). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

When the processing of S1313 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1314). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. When it is determined in the processing of S1314 that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1314: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1316), and the input time storage area of the RAM 223 is stored. The time information stored in the 223e is written to the time information storage area 352b of the RTC292 (S1317), and the power off processing is executed (S1318). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1319), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of the power outage information.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1314 (S1314: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1315), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1315: No), the process returns to the process of S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1315: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this elapsed time confirmation process (S1311). This elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is based on the time information (timekeeping information) of the RTC 292 as described above. The current production period (whether it is a normal production period or a time production period) is determined.

In the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311), first, the current time information is read from the timekeeping register 352a of the RTC292 (S1401), and based on the read current time and the time information stored in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 223. Then, the elapsed time T from turning on the power is calculated (S1402). Here, as a method of calculating the elapsed time T, the time information stored in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 may be subtracted from the information indicating the current time read from the timekeeping register 352a of the RTC292. For example, if the current time information read from the timekeeping register 352a is information indicating 10:15 AM and the time information stored in the input time storage area 223e is information indicating 9:00 AM, the elapsed time T is The difference between 10:15 and 9:00 is taken to calculate 75 minutes.

Then, the current production period is specified (S1403) based on the calculated elapsed time T and the time production table 222b (see FIG. 14) of the ROM 222, and whether or not the current production period is the time production period is determined. Determine (S1404).

As a result of the processing of S1404, when it is determined that it is not the time effect period (that is, it is the normal effect period) (S1404: No), it is determined whether or not the time effect flag 223f is on (S1405). When the time effect flag 223f is on (S1405: Yes), it means that the time effect period has been switched to the normal effect period in this main process, so the time effect flag 223f is turned off (S1406). Next, a back image change command for setting the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the normal back image (back A) is set (S1407), and this process is terminated. Further, in the process of S1405, if the time effect flag 223f is off (S1405: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined as the time effect period as a result of the processing of S1404 (S1404: Yes), it is determined whether or not the time effect flag 223f is on (S1408), and the time effect flag 223f is on. If there is (S1408: Yes), this process is terminated. If the time effect flag 223f is off (S1408: No), it means that the normal effect period has been switched to the time effect period in the main processing of this time, so the time effect flag 223f is turned on (S1408: No). S1409). Next, a back image change command for changing the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to a back image corresponding to the time effect is set (S1410), and this process is terminated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time effect flag 223f is switched when the effect period is switched, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the back image is a simple image such as a fixed image of a single picture (when the back image does not change due to scrolling or the like), the time effect flag 223f is updated and displayed every time the elapsed time confirmation process is performed. You may set the rear image change command.

Next, the command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1312). This command determination process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. ..

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1501). When the variation pattern command is received (S1501: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1502), and the variation pattern selection for extracting the variation pattern type from the received variation pattern command is performed. The process is executed (S1503), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 39) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1504). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1504: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1506), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 39) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1504: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1507). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1507: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol). The number of holdings N) of the fluctuation display in the above is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1508). Further, in the process of S1508, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1508 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, so that the starting winning is won. Is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the process of S1508 to the special symbol reserved ball counter of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning prize is detected or special. At the time of the symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1408 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1507, if the hold ball number command is not received (S1507: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command is received from the main control device 110 (S1509). Then, when the opening command is received (S1509: Yes), the display opening command for executing the opening effect is set in the third symbol display device 81 (S1510), and the process returns to the main process. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1509, if the opening command has not been received (S1509: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of rounds command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1511). Then, when the round number command is received (S1511: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1512), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number command (S1511: Yes). S1513), this process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1511, when the number of rounds command is not received (S1511: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command is received from the main controller 110, and when the ending command is received. (S1514: Yes), a display ending command is set (S1516), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1514, if the ending command is not received (S1514: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1515). ), Return to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

By this process, it is possible to set a command for making various settings to the display control device 114 based on the command output from the main control device 110.

Next, the variation pattern selection process (S1503) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1503). This variation pattern selection process (S1503) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1503 in FIG. 37), and when the variation pattern command is received, it is executed. This is a process for extracting the mode of the variation effect from the variation pattern table 222a.

In this fluctuation pattern selection process, first, the time information corresponding to the current time is acquired from the timekeeping register 352a of the RTC292 (S1601), and the acquired time information and the power-on time stored in the on-time storage area 223e are supported. The elapsed time (T) after the power is turned on is calculated from the time information to be performed (S1602).

Next, based on the calculated elapsed time (T) and the time effect table 222b, the remaining time (t) until the next time effect is started is calculated (S1603). For example, if the elapsed time (T) is 0 hours 55:00 seconds, the next time production starts at 60 minutes 00 seconds, so the remaining time (t) is calculated to be 5 minutes. Then, the fluctuation pattern table 222a is read out (S1604), and the fluctuation pattern is based on the fluctuation type notified by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 and the remaining time (t) calculated by the processing of S1603. Is extracted (S1605), and this process is terminated.

By this fluctuation pattern selection process, the mode of the fluctuation pattern (variation display) can be extracted in consideration of the remaining time (t) until the next time production, so that the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) can be used. Variable display can be executed without shielding.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the variation display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1313). This variation display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1706 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 38). The variation pattern type in the variation effect is acquired from RAM 223 (S1703).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In the process of S1705, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1506 of the command determination process (see FIG. 37), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

Next, based on the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. (S1709), and this process ends. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 56. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 40, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND type flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads out and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is performed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1902, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 40) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 40) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 40) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 41, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S1902. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S1902 and S1902, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes S1903 to S1905 may be executed without performing the processes S1901 and S1902. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 40. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1803, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1804, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1805). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 54 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S3502 in FIG. 54 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command determination process (FIG. 42) is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42 (b)). 42 (b) S2108) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 42 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by power-on. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the ball entered the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S1805, interrupt permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 42 (a). FIG. 42A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 42 (b). FIG. 42B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 22) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 42B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S2102) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S2103) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 to 48.

In the display setting process (S2103), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 to 53.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2104). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), which are determined in the task process (S2104), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 22 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed to shift to the process of S2104.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 48, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 43, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2203).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. 44A. FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored in the variation effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b. Read from (see FIG. 17) and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2301).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main controller. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2306), the variation pattern command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2305, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2302e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 43. In the processing of S2204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variable type command (S2206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2207), and the process returns to S2201.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. 44 (b). FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete out of order) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the variation effect to be performed is finally set (S2402).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. Is set to (S2403), and this process ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2104), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2403, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S2402.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in fact, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 43, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2206, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2208), and the display is displayed. If there is an opening command for (S2208: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2209), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. 45A. FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is read from the opening effect table storage area (see FIG. 17) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2501). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2503). S2504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2505), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2504, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501. The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, when this opening command processing is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced due to the slow read speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data used for the above to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect of the third symbol display device 81 is completed, and thus indicates the first round. If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There was a risk that time would be generated and the player would be anxious about whether or not the operation had stopped, or had a sense of discomfort.

Further, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects (for 16 rounds) in the third symbol display device 81 are completed. If the image data required for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, there is a lot of waiting time from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. There is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable or anxious about whether or not the operation has stopped.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display opening command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and by the time the jackpot variation display is completed on the third symbol display device 81. , Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects (16 rounds) are performed in the third symbol display device 81. ) When the process is completed, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not feel anxious or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined to be the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is started from there. The third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is completed by the end of the variable effect that is a big hit. As a result, when the variable effect that becomes a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the opening effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is worried that the operation has not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Returning to FIG. 43, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2208, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2208: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2210), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S2210: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2211), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (b). FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is stored in the round effect table in the data table storage area 233b. It is read from the area (see FIG. 17) and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2604). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2605), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 43. In the processing of S2210, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2210: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2212), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S2212: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2213), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is stored in the ending effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b. Read from (see FIG. 17) and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2703). S2704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S2705), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this ending command processing, the ending effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot of the special symbol ends, so that the player recognizes that the jackpot has ended. Can be made to.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 43. In the processing of S2212, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2212: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2214), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S2214: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2215), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2215) will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag is set to on (S2801). As a result, it is possible to determine the change of the rear image in the normal image transfer setting process (S3503). Then, among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (rear A to C and the rear corresponding to the time effect), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set. At the same time as turning it on, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to other back image types is set to off (S2802), and the process shifts to S2803.

In the normal image transfer setting process (S3503), when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S2801 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is displayed from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S2802. To identify. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. When the rear image type after the change is the rear A, all the image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235c, so the image is not transferred.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back side A to C or the back side corresponding to the time effect according to the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table, the processing of S2802 is performed. From the set back image discrimination flag, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the image corresponding to the range of the back image is specified. The type of RAM in which the data is stored (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 228 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, two or more rear image change commands may not be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a rear image change command. In the process of S2802, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

When the processing of S2802 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the back type notified by the back image change command is the back for time production (S2803), and if it is not the back for time production (S2803: No). , Ends this process as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the back surface type notified by the rear image change command is the back surface for time production (S2803: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the confirmation display flag is on (S2804). This confirmation display flag is a flag indicating that the confirmation display effect (see FIG. 6A) for confirming the display of the third symbol is being executed, and in the confirmation display setting process described later, the confirmation display of the third symbol is performed. It is set on after setting the corresponding display data table (see S3310 in FIG. 52).

If it is determined in the process of S2804 that the confirmation display flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2804: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the confirmation display flag is on (S2804: Yes), the time production period is set during the state in which the third symbol is confirmed and displayed, or during the display of the demo effect (see FIG. 7). It means that the rear image change command corresponding to is received. Therefore, in this case, the value of the timekeeping counter is set to 0 (S2805), the display data table buffer is cleared (S2806), and this process is terminated. By clearing the display data table buffer, the displayed third symbol or demo image can be deleted.

Here, as described above, in the state where the third symbol is confirmed and displayed, most of the rear image is in a state of being shielded by the third symbol (see FIG. 6A). Further, in the demo effect during the normal effect period, the demo image is displayed on the entire third symbol display device 81, so that the back image is shielded. That is, in either case, it is difficult for the player to see the rear image. Even if the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is displayed in the main display area Dm in this state, most of the notification image 750 is shielded by the third symbol, and the player can produce time. There is a risk of overlooking the start. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the third symbol is confirmed and displayed at the start timing of the time effect, or when the demo effect is being performed, the third symbol or the demo image is deleted by the processing of S2805 and S2806. Therefore, control is performed so that the rear image can be clearly recognized. As a result, the player can surely confirm the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B).

Here, the description returns to FIG. 43. In the processing of S2214, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2214: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2216), and there is an error command. If (S2216: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2217), and the process returns to S2201.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2217) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S2902). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S2902 is determined, and the error type is supported. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S2902, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 43. When it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2216 (S2216: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2218), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

In the processing of S2201 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes). ), The processing of S2202 to S2218 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2201 to S2218 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2201 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 44 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 44 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, , Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 44A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 53, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3001: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3005. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3101).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and each sprite is required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle. Various parameters are determined.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 49. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3005.

In S3005, the pointer update process is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Therefore, the respective values are updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S3201, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3203), and if it is a demo display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data table buffer. The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this process is completed and displayed. Return to the setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3206). ), Ends this process and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 49 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3006 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counting counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S3009).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S3009: No), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is the timing to produce the confirmation display, so the confirmation display for setting the confirmation display of the third symbol The setting process is executed (S3010), and this process ends.

The details of this final display setting process (S3010) will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this final display setting process (S3010).

In the final display setting process, first, the rear image discrimination flag is read (S3301), and it is determined whether or not the currently set rear type is the back corresponding to the time effect (S3302). Then, when it is determined that the back surface does not correspond to the time effect (S3302: No), the definite display data table of the normal mode is read from the definite display effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S3303), and then the contents are cleared by writing Full data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3304). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3305), and the processing is shifted to S3309.

On the other hand, in the process of S3302, when it is determined that the currently set back type is the back corresponding to the time effect (S3302: Yes), the third symbol is reduced and displayed (FIG. 9A). (See) The confirmed display data table is read from the confirmed display effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3306), and then the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e. , Clear the contents (S3307). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3308), and the processing is shifted to S3309. An image of a dog character 740 or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during time production by setting a definite display data table in a mode in which the third symbol is reduced and displayed for the display data table buffer 233d. It is possible to prevent (see FIGS. 8 and 9) from being hindered by the third symbol.

In the process of S3309, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3309). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3310), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3311), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3311 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2104), from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3311. , The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. In the process of S3009, if the confirmation display flag is on (S3009: Yes), the demo display setting process for setting the display mode of the demo effect is executed (S3011), and this process is terminated. The details of this demo display setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 53.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a demo display setting process. In this demo display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3401). If the demo display flag is off (S3401: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the rear image discrimination flag is read out (S3402). ), It is determined whether or not the currently set back type is the back type corresponding to the time effect (S3403). If it is determined in the processing of S3403 that the back surface for time production is not currently set (S3403: No), the demo display data during the normal production period is displayed from the demo production table storage area of the data table storage area 233b. The table is read and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3404), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3405). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3406), and the processing is shifted to S3410.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3403, when it is determined that the currently set back type is the back type corresponding to the time effect (S3403: Yes), the demo effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b (FIG. 17). (See), the demo display data table during the time production period is read and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3407). As described above, as the demo effect during the time effect, no demo image is displayed, and the time effect image is displayed on the full screen of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is playing a game, the time effect can be clearly displayed on all the pachinko machines 10, so that a unified effect can be performed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10. can do. A demo image may be displayed as long as it does not interfere with the image displayed during the time production period. For example, the demo image may be configured to be displayed only in the small display area 780 (see FIG. 8A) in which the variation effect is reduced and displayed during the time effect. This makes it easy for the player who is looking for a platform to play the game to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from playing the game while preventing (suppressing) the image of the time effect from being blocked by the demo effect. Can be recognized by.

When the processing of S3407 is completed, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3408). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3409), and the processing is shifted to S3410.

In the processing of S3410 executed after the processing of S3406 or S3409 is completed, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3410), and the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON. (S3411), this process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, even if a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the final display of the third symbol, the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display opening command is received. If not, the drawing contents can be automatically set so that the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

If it is determined that the demo display flag is on in the processing of S3401 (S3401: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. The setting process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, the details of the transfer setting process (S2105) described above, which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. Is executed (S3502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S3501 (S3501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (b). FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3602). In the process of S3602, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. .. When it is determined by the process of S3602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3603. Further, as a result of the processing of S3601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3603.

In the process of S3603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3604), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3603 (S3603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3605), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 42 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 42 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 43 to 48) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 49 to 53) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. Is displayed as a normal image. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) (see S3501: No in FIG. 54 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3503), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3702), and if it is the transfer data information (S3702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3704), and the process proceeds to S3705.

Further, in the process of S3702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3702: No), the processes of S3703 and S3704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3705. In the process of S3705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3706).

In the process of S3706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S3706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3707. Further, as a result of the processing of S3705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3707.

In the process of S3707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3709). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3710), the back image provided for each back image type. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3712), and the process proceeds to S3713.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image should be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3711, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S3713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3713). The discrimination in the process of S3713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3713, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3713 (S3713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S3714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3715), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data determination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S2104) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 22 (S3801). That is, in the process of S3801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task process. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. As various drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S3802 (S3803). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 42B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the time information (timekeeping information) of the RTC 292, the third symbol display device 81 executes a time effect different from the effect normally executed. It is configured to be possible. This time effect is an effect that is executed every hour and continues for 3 minutes. Since it is executed only for 3 minutes out of 1 hour, it is possible to make the player feel novel by executing the time effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, since the time production is configured to be executed at a fixed interval (every hour), the player can be made to play the game aiming at the execution period of the time production, or the time production is about to start. It is possible to make a player who is about to quit the game want to continue the game until the next time production is completed and enjoy the time production. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

This time effect is configured to be executed based on the elapsed time since the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Therefore, by turning on the power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall at the same timing, the start timing and the end timing of the time effect can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the display effect executed in each pachinko machine 10.

Further, at the start timing of the time effect, the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the player. Here, the time effect is executed according to the elapsed time from the power-on. That is, it is executed regardless of the situation of other display effects such as variable effects. Therefore, if the mode of other display effects such as the variable effect is common between the normal effect period and the time effect period, the notification image 750, the characters displayed during the time effect, the third symbol, the demo image, etc. There is a risk that the time effect, which is one of the effects most desired to be shown to the player, will be difficult for the player to see.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the remaining time until the start of the variable effect is determined, and the mode of the variable effect that does not interfere with the effect executed during the time effect is determined according to the remaining time. It is configured to select. For example, when the variation effect is started during the time effect, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol is displayed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to execute the variation effect without shielding the dog character 740 (see FIGS. 8A and 8B).

Further, in the present embodiment, the displayed third symbol or demo image is deleted when the execution period of the time effect is reached during the final display of the third symbol or the execution of the demo effect. It is configured. That is, in the main display area Dm, the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) can be displayed without being shielded by other images. Therefore, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the time production, which is one of the effects most desired to be shown to the player, has started.

Further, it is possible to execute a display effect having a higher degree of freedom as compared with the case where the size of the area in which the third symbol is displayed is simply switched between the time effect and the normal time. Assuming that, in the normal state, the variation display and the confirmation display of the third symbol are performed on the entire main display area Dm, and the variation display and the confirmation display of the third symbol are performed in the small display area 780 during the time production period, the time is During the production, the third symbol or the demo image is always displayed in the small display area 780. That is, there is a region that cannot be used for the display effect during the time effect. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the notification image 750 can be displayed in the display area including the small display area 780 (see FIG. 6B), a wider display area is used to display with a high degree of freedom. The production can be executed.

In the present embodiment, as an aspect of the time effect, the dog character 740 is configured to perform various actions, but the aspect of the time effect is not limited to the aspect of the present embodiment. As long as the effect is configured to be executed in a special mode different from the normal time, the content of the effect may be arbitrarily determined. For example, instead of the character, the display mode of the third symbol may be changed, or a different sound effect or lamp effect than usual may be performed. Further, by making a big hit during the execution period of the time effect, a special effect different from the case of a big hit at the normal time may be performed. By providing a time production period during which the production of a special mode different from the normal time is executed, it is possible to prevent the production performed by the pachinko machine 10 from becoming monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the production, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, by executing the effect of a special mode only during the time effect period, it is possible to make the player feel that he / she wants to perform the game during the time effect period. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation effect is executed, if the start timing of the time effect is reached immediately after the start of the fluctuation (within 1 second after the start of the fluctuation) or within 1 second before and after the end of the fluctuation, the right side of the main display area Dm. The announcement image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is configured so that the player can clearly see it by displaying the variation effect of the special symbol in a reduced size. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation period of the third symbol and the display period of the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) overlap, the changing third symbol is displayed in a semi-transparent manner. By doing so, the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is configured so that the player can clearly see it. However, if the execution period of the variation effect and the stop display period of 1 second after the end of the variation overlap with the time effect period, the variation effect of the special symbol is uniformly reduced and displayed in the lower right of the main display area Dm. It may be an embodiment. As described above, when the third symbol is displayed in a semi-transparent mode during fluctuation, the third symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm in the normal mode (see FIG. 6A) for 1 second before and after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, it becomes difficult to see the dog character 740 in 1 second before and after the fluctuation stops. On the other hand, if the third symbol is uniformly reduced and displayed, not only the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) but also the dog character 740 displayed during the time production is displayed as the third symbol. It is possible to prevent (suppress) being shielded by.

In the present embodiment, in the case of the confirmed display state in which the stop display of the third symbol is performed for 1 second or longer (that is, there is no reserved ball at the end of the previous fluctuation, and a new ball is entered into the first entry port 64. (If not), or if the start timing of the time effect is reached during the demo effect, the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6 (b)) is displayed by erasing the stop-displayed third symbol or demo image. It is configured so that the player can clearly recognize it, but it is not limited to this. For example, during the time production period, when the drawing list (see FIG. 22) is generated in the drawing process (see FIG. 56), the third symbol or the demo image currently being confirmed is displayed on the back side of the one-frame image. It may be configured to be judged as a sprite to be arranged on the back side of the image. As a result, during the time production period, the third symbol and the demo image that are being confirmed are obscured by the back image arranged in the previous layer and cannot be seen. It is possible to make the player clearly see the effect of the dog character 740, which is the effect to be shown. In addition, since the third symbol being confirmed and the demo image can be made invisible by simply changing the order in which the sprites are arranged, it is necessary to separately prepare a demo image in a difficult-to-see mode for the time production period. There is no. Therefore, since the number of data tables can be reduced, the storage capacity of the character ROM 234 and the work RAM 233 can be reduced in the display control device 114.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol in the confirmed display state is erased when the start timing of the time effect is reached, but it is configured to notify in advance that the third symbol will be erased. May be good. As a result, even if the third symbol is erased, it is possible to recognize that the erase is a normal operation, so that the player can continue the game with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the selected variation effect is different depending on whether or not the variation effect of 1 straddles the start timing of the time effect, but there is a hold ball and the hold is exhausted. As a result, when it is determined by pre-reading that the start timing of the time effect is crossed, the mode of the effect may be changed before and after the time effect. That is, the period until the start of the time effect is determined, the period is set to one effect period, and the advance notice effect is performed in a normal manner (that is, in the execution period of one or a plurality of variable effects). Set the effect of 1). Then, after the start timing of the time effect, a special mode of effect may be set over the remaining variable effect held at the start of the effect. As a result, the effect can be performed over a plurality of variable effects, and the mode of the effect can be changed before and after the start of the time effect, so that a wide variety of effects can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. In the first embodiment described above, in the case of the confirmed display state in which the stop display of the third symbol is performed for 1 second or longer (that is, there is no reserved ball at the end of the previous fluctuation, and a new ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64. When the start timing of the time effect is reached (when there is no ball entering), the confirmation display of the third symbol is erased. This prevents the display (notification image 750) that announces the start of the time production, which is one of the images most desired to be shown to the player, from being obscured by the final display of the third symbol and becoming difficult to see. It was (suppressed). That is, it is configured so that the notification image 750 can be clearly seen by the player.

Further, in the conventional game machine, a game machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional game machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the design, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device. Here, in the conventional game machine, the priority for displaying an image is set. For example, a symbol directly related to whether or not it is a big hit is displayed so as to be clearly visible, and other images are displayed. Is displayed in an area other than the display area where the design is displayed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

However, in a conventional gaming machine, when an image having a high priority is displayed, the display area for displaying another image becomes small, so that it may be difficult to visually recognize the other image. It was. In particular, when a demo effect is installed, the demo effect may be displayed in full screen regardless of the state, so that other images may not be displayed. That is, even if a special effect such as a time effect in the first embodiment is provided, there is a risk that the conventional gaming machine cannot show the image desired to be shown to the player such as the time effect.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the final display of the third symbol is reduced to the lower right portion (small display area 780) of the main display area Dm. That is, while the notification image 750 is clearly displayed, the final display of the third symbol can also be confirmed. As a result, even if the player misses the final display of the third symbol until the start timing of the time effect, the final display of the third symbol can be confirmed after the start of the time effect. If the image displayed at the start timing of the time effect is a demo image, the demo image is hidden based on the start of the time effect so that the time effect is displayed in a larger display area. It is configured in. As a result, when the display timing of the time effect is reached, the image is displayed according to the type of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (confirmed display of the third symbol or demo image). By changing the displayed image and the display mode of the time effect, the effect to be shown to the player can be displayed more appropriately.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that some processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. It is a point that has been changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and other processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 57, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the start timing of the time effect is reached in the final display state of the third symbol will be described. FIG. 57A is a diagram showing the display contents when the time effect is started 5 seconds before the start of the time effect in the final display state of the third symbol. As shown in FIG. 57 (a), when 5 seconds before the start of the time effect in the state where the third symbol is confirmed and displayed, "contact time 5 seconds before" is displayed in the small area Ds3 as in the first embodiment. Characters are displayed. As described above, this character is updated with the passage of time, and is configured to be "0 seconds" at the start timing of the time effect.

FIG. 57B is a diagram showing the display contents when the start timing of the time effect is reached while the third symbol is confirmed and displayed. As shown in FIG. 57 (b), at the start timing of the time effect, the third symbol, which has been confirmed and displayed in the main display area Dm, is reduced and displayed in the small display area 780 in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm. At the same time, a display (notification image 750) for notifying the start of the time effect is displayed large in the main display area Dm. That is, both the notification image 750 and the third symbol can be confirmed. As a result, even if the player misses the stop-displayed third symbol until the start timing of the time effect, the stop symbol can be confirmed after the start of the time effect. Further, by reducing the display of the third symbol, it is possible to prevent the notification image 750 from being shielded by the third symbol, so that the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) can be clearly visually recognized by the player. Can be made to.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the second embodiment>
Next, the rear image change command process 2 (S2221) executed in the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process 2 (S2221). The rear image change command process 2 (S2221) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in place of the rear image change command process (see FIG. 47) in the first embodiment. This process is executed when a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 114.

Of the back image change command process 2 (see FIG. 58), each process of S2801 to S2803 is the same as each process of S2801 to S2803 of the back image change command process (see FIG. 47) in the first embodiment. Is executed. Then, in the process of S2803, when it is determined that the image is not the back image for time production (S2803: No), the present process is terminated as it is as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, if it is determined that the back image is for time production (S2803: Yes), the process proceeds to S2811.

In the process of S2811, it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S2811). If it is determined in the process of S2811 that the demo display flag is on (S2811: Yes), the start timing of the time effect is set during the display of the demo effect (see FIG. 7), and the rear image change command corresponding to the time effect is set. Means that you have received. Therefore, in this case, the value of the timekeeping counter is set to 0 (S2812), the display data table buffer 233d is cleared (S2813), and this process is terminated. When the display data table buffer 233d is cleared by the process of S2813, the display image of the demonstration effect is deleted, so that the notification image 750 can be clearly seen by the player. Further, when the back image corresponding to the time effect is set, the demo effect for the time effect is set in the next demo display setting process (see FIG. 53). As the demo effect during the time effect, no demo image is displayed, so that the image for the time effect can be displayed on the full screen of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the display area that can be used to display the time effect, rather than the start timing of the time effect during the final display effect. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the effect that can be displayed in the time effect can be further increased.

On the other hand, in the process of S2811, when it is determined that the demo display flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2811: No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation display flag is on (S2814), and the confirmation display is performed. If it is determined that the flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2814: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2814, when it is determined that the confirmation display flag is on (S2814: Yes), the confirmation display data table of the mode in which the third symbol is reduced and displayed (see FIG. 57 (b)) is displayed. , The data table storage area 233b is read from the confirmation display effect table storage area, set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2815), and this process is terminated.

By performing this process, when the start timing of the time effect is reached, the third symbol that has been confirmed and displayed in the main display area Dm is reduced and displayed in the lower right portion (small display area 780) of the main display area Dm. As a result, the notification image 750 can be clearly visually recognized by the player. Further, even if the period from the end of the fluctuation to the start timing of the time effect is short, the third symbol continues to be displayed in the lower right portion (small display area 780) of the main display area Dm, so that the player can be sure. You can check the stop symbol.

Here, for example, the timing at which the third symbol is stopped and displayed even though the out-of-reach in a highly expected mode is executed immediately before the start of the time production and the player's expectation for the jackpot has increased. The player may be forced to overlook it. In such a case, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the start timing of the time effect is reached before the player confirms the stop symbol, the third symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is deleted, so that the player On the other hand, there was a risk of anxiety such as "I think it was a hit, but the hit was canceled due to the time production."

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the processing of S2815 is configured to reduce and display the third symbol that has been confirmed and displayed when the start timing of the time effect is reached. Even after the start of, the player can be made to confirm the stop symbol in the previous variation effect. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the player from missing the third symbol, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy by missing the third symbol.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the case of the confirmed display state of the third symbol (that is, there is no reserved ball at the end of the previous fluctuation, and a new entry into the first entry port 64 is made. When the start timing of the time effect is reached (when there is no sphere), the third symbol, which has been fixedly displayed in the entire main display area Dm, is reduced and displayed in the small display area 780. Therefore, the notification image 750 can be clearly visually recognized by the player, and even if the player misses the final display of the third symbol until the timing when the time production starts, the third symbol is displayed after the time production starts. It is possible to confirm the confirmed display of the symbol.

Further, as in the first embodiment, in the present embodiment as well, the demo image is not displayed at all in the demo effect set during the time effect. That is, the rear image is set to be displayed on the full screen without being interrupted at all. As a result, during the period (for example, 15 seconds) in which the final display of the third symbol is executed, the third symbol stopped and displayed in the previous variation effect can be continuously displayed in the small display area 780. , When the demo production period is reached, the time production can be executed in a wider display area. That is, although the priority of displaying is lower than that of the time production, the display content (the final display of the third symbol showing the lottery result of the previous special symbol), which is relatively interesting to the player, is an obstacle to the time production. By hiding the display content (demo image) that can be displayed so as not to be displayed and that is of relatively low interest to the player, the degree of freedom in time production can be further increased. That is, when the display timing of the time effect is reached, the image is displayed according to the type of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (confirmed display of the third symbol or demo image). By changing the display mode of the image and the time effect, the effect desired to be shown to the player can be displayed more appropriately.

In the present embodiment, in the final display state of the third symbol, when the start timing of the time effect is reached, the final display of the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right portion (small display area 780) of the main display area Dm. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when a plurality of types of time effects having different effect modes (for example, time effect A and time effect B) are provided, the position where the third symbol is reduced and displayed is set according to the type of time effect to be started. It may be specified. For example, when the time effect A is started, the third symbol is reduced to the lower right part of the main display area Dm, and when the time effect B is started, the third symbol is reduced to the lower left part of the main control area Dm. It may be displayed. That is, in each time effect, the third symbol may be reduced and displayed at a position that has the least influence on the effect executed during the time effect. As a result, the player can visually recognize the effect image in each time effect without being obscured by the third symbol.

The position where the final display of the third symbol is reduced and displayed may be changed depending on the operation content of the frame button 228 by the player. For example, in the final display state of the third symbol, when the start timing of the time effect is reached, the final display of the third symbol is first reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, and the frame button 228 is pressed. The reduced display position changes to the lower left part. Then, by pressing the frame button 228 again, the position of the reduced-displayed third symbol changes from the lower left portion to the upper left portion, and by further pressing the frame button 228, the position of the reduced-displayed third symbol is displayed. Changes from the upper left part to the upper right part. Then, the third symbol may be configured to return to the lower right portion by operating the frame button 228 in a state where the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper right portion. As a result, it is not necessary to specify the position where the final display of the third symbol is reduced and displayed according to each time effect, the program capacity can be reduced, and the final display of the third symbol is reduced and displayed according to the player's preference. You can decide the position to be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the final display state of the third symbol, when the start timing of the time effect is reached, the final display of the third symbol is reduced to the lower right portion (small display area 780) of the main display area Dm. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display may be reduced based on the player pressing the frame button 228. For example, in the final display state of the third symbol, when the start timing of the time effect is reached, the final display of the third symbol is deleted, and the player presses the frame button 228 to obtain the third symbol. The final display of the three symbols may be reduced and displayed in the lower right portion (small display area 780) of the main display area Dm. As a result, only when the player wants to confirm the confirmed display of the third symbol, the confirmed display can be confirmed by pressing the frame button 228. Further, in other cases, since the finalized display of the third symbol remains in the erased state, the player can concentrate on the effect executed during the time effect.

Contrary to the above, the player may press the frame button 228 to erase the reduced display of the finalized display of the third symbol. For example, in the final display state of the third symbol, when the start timing of the time effect is reached, the final display of the third symbol is automatically reduced to the lower right portion (small display area 780) of the main display area Dm. Is displayed, and when the player presses the frame button 228, the reduced display of the confirmed display may be deleted. As a result, the reduced display of the final display of the third symbol can be erased at an arbitrary timing of the player, such as after the player confirms the final display of the third symbol. As a result, the player can concentrate on the production performed during the time production.

In the present embodiment, when the execution period of the demo effect is reached during the time effect (15 seconds have passed since the final display of the third symbol was executed), the demo effect is deleted as in the first embodiment. However, the mode of the demo effect executed during the time effect is not limited to this, as long as it can prevent the image of the time effect from being obscured by the demo effect. A demo image may be displayed. For example, the demo effect may be displayed only in the small display area 780 (see FIG. 8A) in which the variation effect is reduced and displayed during the time effect. Further, a display area having a display area smaller than that of the small display area 780 may be provided, and the demo effect may be displayed in the display area. Further, for example, the demo effect itself may be configured not to be performed, and the final display may be continued. That is, when the holding ball does not exist when the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped, the stopped symbol is reduced to the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81 unless there is a new entry into the first entry port 64. It may be configured to continue to be displayed in the embodiment. Further, for example, during the time production period, the demo image may be displayed on the background of the dog character 740. As a result, the effect during the time effect can be clearly displayed, and the area where the demo effect is normally displayed can be used as the display area of the time effect, so that the degree of freedom of the time effect can be increased. ..

Further, when the demo effect is executed during the time effect period, the third symbol stopped and displayed in the previous variable effect may be displayed in the small display area 780 as in the final display effect. As a result, when the demo effect and the final display effect are executed during the time effect, the same display data table may be set, so that the number of display data tables can be reduced. Therefore, the data capacity of the work RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the setting of the final display effect, the demo effect is continuously executed until the next variable effect is started. It is not limited to this. For example, if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without starting the variable effect after the execution of the demo effect is started, the display may be switched to the final display effect. That is, the final display effect and the demo effect may be alternately repeated until the variable effect is newly started. Specifically, when the display data table for demonstration is set and the data read from the display data table buffer 233d is END information, the display data table buffer 233d is used for the final display effect. It may be configured to set the display data table. That is, in the pointer update process (see FIG. 51), the data indicated by the pointer 233f is the END information (see S3202 in FIG. 51), and the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is the display data for the demo effect. In the case of a table (see S3203 in FIG. 51), instead of the processes of S3204 and S3205, the same processes as the processes of S3301 to S3309 of the final display setting process (see FIG. 52) may be executed. Further, when the definite display data table is selected in the process of S3303 or S3306, the data table corresponding to the previous stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol determination flag may be selected from the data table storage area 233b. .. With this configuration, even if the pachinko machine 10 is vacant for a long time, it is possible to give an opportunity to periodically check the third symbol shown by the previous fluctuation effect, so that the pachinko machine can be used. It is possible to select the pachinko machine 10 on which the stop symbol of one's preference is displayed for the player who intends to start the game at 10 and start the game. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the time production period is reached during the final display production, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the small display area 780, and the time production period is during the demonstration production. In the case of, since the demo image (and the third symbol) is configured to be hidden, the time effect can be displayed in a wider display area. Therefore, the degree of freedom in time production can be increased.

Further, when the start timing of the time effect is reached during the display of the final display effect, the display mode may be changed according to the number of repetitions of the final display effect and the demo effect. For example, when the start timing of the time effect is reached during the display of the final display effect set first after the end of the variable effect, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the small display area 780. .. On the other hand, if the start timing of the time effect is reached during the display of the final display effect set after the end of the demo effect, the third symbol is hidden. As a result, the previous stop symbol can be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds) after the end of the variable effect, so that the player can display the stop symbol regardless of whether or not it is the time effect period. On the other hand, the previous stop symbol can be surely confirmed. Further, the final display effect set after the end of the demo effect is an effect set after the state in which the third symbol is not displayed (demo effect), and is compared with the final display effect set after the end of the variable effect. The need to display the third symbol is reduced. Therefore, in this case, by configuring the third symbol so as to be hidden, the image of the time effect can be visually recognized more clearly.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 65. In the second embodiment described above, in the case of the confirmed display state in which the stop display of the third symbol is performed for 1 second or longer (that is, there is no reserved ball at the end of the previous fluctuation, and a new ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64. When the start timing of the time effect is reached (when there is no ball entering), the final display of the third symbol is reduced and displayed. This prevents the display (notification image 750) that announces the start of the time production, which is one of the images most desired to be shown to the player, from being obscured by the final display of the third symbol and becoming difficult to see. At the same time, the player can confirm the final display of the third symbol even after the start of the time production.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the mode of the final display of the third symbol is set based on the remaining time until the time effect is started. Specifically, if it is determined that the start timing of the time effect is reached within 15 seconds for setting the final display of the third symbol, the final display of the third symbol is reduced and displayed before the start timing of the time effect. A fixed display data table of the mode is set. As a result, it is possible to set the final display of the third symbol to be reduced in advance before the start timing of the time effect, so that the notification image 750 is displayed at the start timing of the time effect. It is only necessary to execute (the process of displaying the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) and the process of reducing the final display of the third symbol do not have to be executed at the same timing). Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 114 at the start timing of the time effect can be reduced.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is that the data in the data table storage area 223b stored in the RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is partially different. A part of the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been changed, a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has changed. The point is that some of the processing to be executed has changed. For other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and other processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the data table storage area 223b stored in the RAM 203 of the display control device 114 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing data stored in the data table storage area 233b in the present embodiment. Similar to each of the above embodiments, the data table storage area 233b has a storage area for storing data tables corresponding to each effect (variable effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect, final display effect, and demo effect). It is provided. In the data table storage area 223b of the present embodiment, the configuration of the confirmation display effect table storage area for storing the display data table corresponding to the confirmation display effect is changed from each of the above-described embodiments. Since the other storage areas are the same as those in each of the above embodiments, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The table storage area for the final display effect of the present embodiment will be specifically described. In the confirmation display effect table storage area of the present embodiment, the confirmation display of the third symbol of the normal mode (see FIG. 57 (a)) is performed for 5 seconds, and then the confirmation display of the reduced mode is performed for 10 seconds for "5 seconds. After performing the confirmation display of the normal mode (see FIG. 57 (a)) for 10 seconds with the storage area for storing "various display data tables for the confirmation display effect" (see S233b7a in FIG. 59), the confirmation display of the reduced mode is performed for 5 seconds. A storage area for storing "various display data tables for 10-second confirmation display effect" (see S233b7b in FIG. 59) and a normal mode confirmation display (see FIG. 57 (a)) for 15 seconds "15-second confirmation" A storage area for storing "various display data tables for display effect" (see S233b7c in FIG. 59), and a storage area for storing "various display data tables for definite display effect of reduction mode" for 15 seconds to confirm the reduction mode. (See S233b7c in FIG. 59) is provided.

Details of the processing will be described later in the stop display selection process (see FIG. 62) and the final display setting process 2 (see FIG. 65), but until the start of the time effect according to the remaining time until the time effect is started. A mode in which the final display of the third symbol is reduced and displayed (a mode of the final display effect) is selected and set. As a result, it is possible to set the final display of the third symbol to be reduced in advance before the start timing of the time effect, so that the notification image 750 is displayed at the start timing of the time effect. It is only necessary to execute (the process of displaying the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) and the process of displaying the finalized display of the third symbol in reduced size do not have to be executed at the same timing). Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 114 at the start timing of the time effect can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, the special symbol variation process 2 (S111) executed in the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 2 (S111). The special symbol variation process 2 (S111) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 24) in each of the above-described embodiments. It is a process to be performed.

In each of the special symbol variation processes 2 (S111), S201 to S215, the same processes as those of S201 to S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 24) in each of the above-described embodiments are executed. To. Then, in the process of S212, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a big hit (S212: No), each process of S221 to S223 is executed before shifting to the process of S214.

Specifically, in the process of S212, when it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a big hit (S212: No), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S221). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c acquired in the process of S221 is larger than 0 (S222).

In the process of S222, if it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S222: No), the stop display command is set (S223). ), The process proceeds to S214. On the other hand, in the process of S222, if it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S222: Yes), the process of S223 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S214.

Here, the stop display command set by the process of S223 is a case where the lottery result is not a big hit and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0 at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol, that is, the confirmed display state of the third symbol. It is set when This stop display command is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and the stop display command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 31). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the stop display command, the third symbol by the start of the time effect is determined by the stop display selection process (see FIG. 62) described later, according to the remaining time until the time effect is started. Selects a mode in which the confirmation display of is reduced and displayed (a mode of the confirmation display effect), and transmits the confirmation display command for display to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display confirmation display command, the confirmation display data table is selected and set in the display data table buffer 223d based on the mode of the confirmation display effect indicated by the command. As a result, it is possible to set in advance that the final display of the third symbol is reduced before the start timing of the time effect.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, various processes executed in the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. This command determination process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. It is a process.

In this command determination process (S1312), S1521 and S1522 are executed in addition to the same processes of S1501 to S1516 as the command determination process (see FIG. 37) in each of the above-described embodiments. Specifically, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received in the process of S1504 (S1504: No), it is determined whether or not the stop display command has been received (S1521).

If it is determined that the stop display command has been received in the process of S1521 (S1521: Yes), the stop display selection process is executed (S1522), and the process returns to the main process. This stop display selection process (S1522) is a process for determining the remaining time until the time effect is started, and setting the final display of the third symbol to be reduced and displayed before the start timing of the time effect. Is. On the other hand, in the process of S1521, if it is determined that the stop display command has not been received (S1521: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1507. As described above, in each process after S1507, the same process as each process after S1507 in the command determination process (see FIG. 37) in each of the above embodiments is executed.

Next, the details of the stop display selection process (S1522) will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this stop display selection process (S1522). As described above, the stop display selection process (S1522) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) that a stop display command has been received, until the time effect is started. This is a process of selecting a mode in which the final display of the third symbol is reduced and displayed (a mode of the final display effect) by the start of the time effect according to the remaining time.

When this stop display selection process (S1522) is executed, first, the time information corresponding to the current time is acquired from the timekeeping register 352a of the RTC292 (S3901), and the acquired time information and the input time storage area 223e are stored. The elapsed time (T) after the power is turned on is calculated from the time information corresponding to the power on time (S3902).

Next, based on the calculated elapsed time (T) and the time effect table 222b, the remaining time (t) until the next time effect is started is calculated (S3903). For example, if the elapsed time (T) is 0 hours 55:00 seconds, the next time production starts at 60 minutes 00 seconds, so the remaining time (t) is calculated to be 5 minutes.

Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining time (t) is 15 seconds or more (S3904), and if it is determined that the remaining time (t) is 15 seconds or more (S3904: Yes), the display corresponding to the final display effect of 15 seconds is performed. Set the confirmation display command (S3905), and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3904, if it is determined that the remaining time (t) is not 15 seconds or more (that is, less than 15 seconds) (S3904: No), is the remaining time (t) 10 seconds or more? Whether or not it is determined (S3906). In the process of S3906, when it is determined that the remaining time (t) is 10 seconds or more (S3906: Yes), a 10-second definite display effect (a normal definite display effect is performed for 10 seconds, and 10 seconds to 15 seconds). Then, the final display command for display corresponding to the final display effect in which the third symbol is reduced is set (S3907), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S3906, when it is determined that the remaining time (t) is not 10 seconds or more (S3906: No), then it is determined whether or not the remaining time (t) is 5 seconds or more (S3908). In the process of S3908, when it is determined that the remaining time (t) is 5 seconds or more (S3908: Yes), a 5 second definite display effect (5 seconds normal definite display effect is performed and 5 seconds to 15 seconds). Then, the display confirmation display command corresponding to the effect of performing the confirmation display effect in the reduced mode of the third symbol) is set (S3909), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3908, when it is determined that the remaining time (t) is not 5 seconds or more (S3908: No), a definite display effect of the reduced mode (an effect of reducing the third symbol for 15 seconds and displaying it definitely). A confirmation display command for display corresponding to (S3910) is set, and this process is terminated.

Here, the display confirmation display command set by the processing of S3905, S3907, S3909 or S3910 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the main processing executed by the MPU 221 (see FIG. 35). Is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S1302) of. When the display control device 114 receives the confirmation display command for display, the display data table for the confirmation display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d based on the mode of the confirmation display effect indicated by the confirmation display command for display. To. As a result, it is possible to set a display data table in which the final display of the third symbol is reduced and displayed by the start of the time effect according to the remaining time until the time effect is started.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various processes executed in the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. First, FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a command determination process (S2102) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 according to the third embodiment. This command determination process (S2102) is executed in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114, and is received from the voice lamp control device 113 as described above. Determine the command that was executed.

In this command determination process (S2102), the processes of S2201 to S2214 and S2216 to S2218 are the same as the processes of S2201 to S2214 and S2216 to S2218 in each of the above-described embodiments.

If it is determined that there is a back image change command in the process of S2214 (S2214: Yes), the back image change command process 3 is executed (S2231), and the process returns to the process of S2201. The details of the rear image change command process 3 (S2231) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the process of S2214, when it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2214: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display confirmation display command (S2232). If it is determined in the process of S2232 that there is a confirmation display command for display (S2322: Yes), the mode of the confirmation display effect is extracted from the received command (S2233), and the process returns to the process of S2201. On the other hand, in the process of S2232, when it is determined that there is no confirmation display command for display (S2232: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2216, and the same processes after S2216 as those of the above-described embodiments are performed. The final display data table is selected in the final display setting process 2 (FIG. 3021), which will be described later, based on the mode of the final display effect extracted in the process of S2233.

Next, the details of the rear image change command process 3 (S2231) will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process 3 (S2231). The rear image change command process 3 (S2231) is the above-described first rear image change command process 3 (S2231) when the rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 114 in the command determination process (see FIG. 64) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. 2 This is a process executed in place of the rear image change command process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the embodiment.

In each of the rear image change command processes 3 (S2231), S2801 and S2802, the same processes as those of S2801 and S2802 of the rear image change command process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment are performed. Will be executed. Then, when the process of S2802 is completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 63). That is, in the present embodiment, the processes S2803 and S281 to 2815 executed in the rear image change command process 2 (see FIG. 58) of the second embodiment are omitted.

In the present embodiment, by receiving the display confirmation display command from the voice lamp control device 113 described above, the confirmation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 65) described later causes the third confirmation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 65) before the start timing of the time effect. The final display of the symbol is set to be reduced. Therefore, at the timing of changing the rear image for time production, the process of erasing the demo display (see S2813 in FIG. 58) and the process of changing the final display of the third symbol to the reduced display (see S2815 in FIG. 58). Since it is not necessary to execute it, this process is terminated when the process of S2802 is completed. As a result, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced at the timing of changing the back image for time production.

Next, the confirmation display setting process 2 (S3021) will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the final display setting process 2 (S3021). This confirmation display setting process 2 (S3021) is performed when it is determined in the display setting process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 that the time counter is 0 or less and the confirmation display flag is off. , This is a process executed in place of the final display setting process (see FIG. 52) in each of the above-described embodiments.

In the confirmation display setting processing 2 (S3021), the processing of S3309 to S3311 is the same as the processing of S3309 to S3311 of the confirmation display setting processing (see FIG. 52) in each of the above-described embodiments. Further, in the final display setting process 2 (S3021), each process of S3321 to S3324 is executed instead of each process of S3301 to S3308 in the final display setting process (see FIG. 52). Each of these processes will be described in detail.

In the final display setting process 2 (S3021), first, the mode of the final display effect extracted in the process of S2233 in the command determination process (see FIG. 63) described above is acquired (S3321). Then, based on the acquired mode of the confirmed display effect, the corresponding display data table is selected from the confirmed display effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3322). For example, the confirmation for display corresponding to the confirmation display effect of 10 seconds (the effect of performing the normal confirmation display effect for 10 seconds and performing the confirmation display effect in the reduced mode of the third symbol in 10 seconds to 15 seconds). If it is a display command, the corresponding display data table is read from "various display data tables for fixed display effect for 10 seconds" in the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3323). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3324), and the processing is shifted to S3309. In the processes of S3309 to S3311, the same processes as those of S3309 to S3311 of the final display setting process (see FIG. 52) in each of the above-described embodiments are executed, and this process is terminated to return to the V interrupt process.

By this confirmation display setting process 2 (S3021), the confirmation display data table can be set based on the mode of the confirmation display effect notified by the confirmation display command for display. Further, in the present embodiment, the display confirmation display commands corresponding to different modes are output based on the remaining time until the time effect is started. As a result, it is possible to set in advance that the final display of the third symbol is reduced before the start timing of the time effect.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the final display of the third symbol is set, the remaining time until the time effect is started is determined, and the remaining time is different based on the value of the remaining time. It is configured to set a fixed display effect. More specifically, in the 15-second fixed display effect, display data that can set a period in which the third symbol is confirmed and displayed in a normal mode and a period in which the third symbol is confirmed and displayed in a reduced mode. Multiple types of tables are specified. Then, the fixed display data table is selected so that the period in which the third symbol is fixedly displayed ends in the normal manner before the start timing of the time effect and the fixed display effect is switched to the reduced display period. It is configured. As a result, before the notification image 750 (see FIG. 57 (b)) for notifying the start of the time effect is displayed, the confirmed third symbol can be reduced and displayed, so that the third symbol can be reduced and displayed. It is possible to prevent the notification image 750 from being shielded. Therefore, the notification image 750, which is one of the images most desired to be shown to the player, can be clearly visually recognized by the player. Further, in the present embodiment, since the switching timing of the display mode of the third symbol is defined in the final display data table, the third symbol should be reduced and displayed in advance before the time effect is started. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the process of displaying the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) and the process of displaying the finalized display of the third symbol at the same timing can be suppressed, and the display at the start timing of the time effect can be suppressed. The processing load of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, in the data table storage area 233b, after the definite display data table corresponding to the effect in which the third symbol is definitely displayed in the normal mode and the third symbol is definitely displayed for 10 seconds in the normal mode, A confirmation display data table corresponding to an effect of executing a confirmation display for 5 seconds in a reduced mode of the third symbol, and a mode in which the third symbol is reduced after the third symbol is confirmed and displayed for 5 seconds in a normal mode. A definite display data table corresponding to the effect of executing the definite display for 10 seconds and a definite display data table corresponding to the effect of definitely displaying the third symbol in a reduced mode were defined. The type of table is not limited to this. The period during which the third symbol is confirmed and displayed may be increased in a normal manner (for example, a confirmation display data table corresponding to 3 seconds, 6 seconds, 9 seconds, 12 seconds, and 15 seconds may be provided). As a result, the period from the reduced display of the third symbol to the start of the time effect can be set to within 3 seconds at the maximum, so that the third symbol is difficult to see even though the time effect is not started. The situation can be limited to a short time. On the contrary, the types of the confirmed display data table may be reduced. For example, the confirmation display data table corresponding to the confirmation display effect in which the third symbol is confirmed and displayed in the normal manner for 10 seconds may be reduced. As a result, the storage capacity of the data table storage area 233b and the character ROM 234 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the remaining time until the start of the time effect based on the time information measured by the RTC 292, but the display control device 114 and the RTC 292 are electrically connected and displayed. The control device 114 may be configured so that the remaining time can be directly determined. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to omit the process of determining the remaining time until the time effect is started and setting a different display confirmation display command according to the remaining time. The processing load can be reduced.

Although the present invention has been described above based on each of the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easy that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred from.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, the effect displayed during the time effect is only the effect in which the dog character 740 performs various actions, but the effect is not limited to this. The character to be produced may be changed according to the start time of the time effect (for example, the effect by the dog character 740, the cat character, and the monkey character may be switched for each time effect). In addition, the production content may be changed according to the start time of the time production and the season. For example, when the time effect is started in the evening, the sunset sky may be displayed behind the character performing the effect. In addition, when the time effect is started in winter, the character performing the effect may be displayed by wearing winter clothes, and snow may be accumulated around the character. As a result, the time production can be diversified, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of playing the pachinko machine 10.

In each of the above embodiments, a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the condition for starting the demonstration effect and the final display of the third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the third symbol is set to the confirmed display state, the start timing of the time effect is determined, and the set period of the confirmed display state is selected so that the demo effect is started before the start timing of the time effect. You may.

In each of the above embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 and the RTC 292 are electrically connected, and the type of the effect period is determined by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 based on the information acquired from the RTC 292. Alternatively, the main control device 110 and the RTC 292 may be electrically connected, and the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 may be configured to determine the type of the effect period based on the information acquired from the RTC 292. In this case, the main control device 110 may include information on the type of the effect period in the command output to the voice lamp control device 113. The processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced by having the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determine the type of the effect period instead of the MPU of the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the above embodiments, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the time information stored in the RAM 223 is stored in the time information storage area 352b of the RTC 292 to retain the time information even during the power failure state. Although it was configured to be possible, instead of this, a storage means capable of holding the stored information even when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power failure state may be provided separately from the RTC292. A flash memory or the like corresponds to a specific example of the storage means. As a result, the storage area of the register 352 provided in the RTC 292 can be reduced, so that the price of the RTC 292 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, when the power is turned on, the time information is stored in the time information storage area 352b of the RTC 292 as the time information to be stored in the power-on time storage area 223e based on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is on or off. It was determined whether to store the time information that was set or the time information that was timed by the RTC292, but instead, based on the signals output from the hall computers connected to the plurality of pachinko machines 10. It may be configured to determine the time information stored in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 223.

Specifically, the hall computer is configured to be able to determine whether or not the power of each connected pachinko machine 10 is on, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while all the power of each pachinko machine 10 is off. If it is determined that the power has been turned on (that is, if it is determined that the power has been turned on all at once for each pachinko machine 10), a signal indicating that the power has been turned on all at once is output to each pachinko machine 10 that has been turned on. Configure to do. On the other hand, of the pachinko machines 10 connected to the hall computer, only one pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the other pachinko machines 10 are determined to be turned on. When it is determined that the power has been turned on to the one pachinko machine 10 that has been turned off, a signal indicating that the power has been turned on independently is output to the one pachinko machine 10 that has been turned on. Configure to. Then, the time information to be stored in the on-time storage area 223e may be determined according to the type of the signal output from the hall computer when the power is turned on.

In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the modes of the final display effect and the demo effect are changed depending on whether or not the time effect period is set, but the time is the trigger for changing the effect mode. It is not limited to directing. For example, based on the pachinko machine 10 equipped with a function of displaying a screen (game history, specifications, etc.) different from the game screen by the operation of the player on a part of the third symbol display device 81, the screen is switched to a different screen. It may be configured to change the production mode.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for displaying a variable display of a sequence of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is not provided. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed.

A pachinko machine may be a combination of some or all of the above-described embodiments.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Prevents island-linked production from starting when the symbol is stopped)
The display means for displaying the symbol, the dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the identification information for which the dynamic display by the dynamic display means is predetermined. In a gaming machine provided with a privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game advantageous to the player when the game ends, the display means executes a specific effect different from the dynamic display of the identification information based on the establishment of the specific condition. The specific effect display means to be performed, the stop display means for stopping and displaying the identification information displayed after the dynamic display by the dynamic display means is completed in the first aspect, and the first identification information by the stop display means. When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means during the stop display in the first aspect, the identification information during the stop display in the first aspect is the second aspect in which the display area is smaller than that of the first aspect. The gaming machine A1 is provided with a display mode switching means for switching the display mode of the identification information during the stop display, as displayed in.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional game machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the design, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device. Here, in the conventional game machine, the priority for displaying an image is set. For example, a symbol directly related to whether or not it is a big hit is displayed so as to be clearly visible, and other images are displayed. Is displayed in an area other than the display area where the design is displayed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

However, in a conventional gaming machine, when an image having a high priority is displayed, the display area for displaying another image becomes small, so that it may be difficult to visually recognize the other image. It was. That is, regardless of whether or not the image should be visually recognized by the player, the image becomes difficult to visually recognize, and there is a risk that the display content cannot be set to be suitable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, based on the establishment of the specific condition, the specific effect display means executes a specific effect different from the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. The identification information displayed after the end of the dynamic display by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed by the stop display means in the first aspect. Then, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means during the stop display of the identification information by the stop display means in the first aspect, the identification information in the stop display in the first aspect is obtained from the first aspect. The display mode of the identification information during the stop display is switched by the display mode switching means so that the display is displayed in the second mode in which the display area is small.

As a result, the identification information displayed at the end of the previous dynamic display is displayed in the second mode so that the player can confirm the identification information, and the specific effect is executed in a larger display area. be able to. That is, the display area of the identification information in the stopped display state, which is less frequently confirmed by the player than when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display means or at the end of the dynamic display, is displayed. It can be reduced and the specific effect can be displayed more clearly. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to set a suitable display content.

In the game machine A1, when the dynamic display of the new identification information is not started by the dynamic display means until a certain period of time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display means, the stop display is displayed. When a predetermined image display means for displaying a predetermined image different from the identification information in place of the identification information and the specific effect display means execute the specific effect while the predetermined image is displayed by the predetermined image display means. A2 is a gaming machine A2, further comprising a predetermined image switching means for switching the display mode of the predetermined image to a display mode in which the display area is smaller than the identification information displayed in the second aspect.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, when the dynamic display of the new identification information is not started by the dynamic display means until a certain period of time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display means, the identification information is replaced with the stopped display. A predetermined image different from the identification information is displayed by the predetermined image display means. Further, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means while the predetermined image is displayed by the predetermined image display means, the display mode of the predetermined image is based on the identification information displayed in the second aspect by the predetermined image switching means. It is set to a display mode in which the display area is small.

As a result, when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific effect can be clearly displayed while the player can visually recognize the stopped and displayed identification information. On the other hand, when the predetermined image is displayed and the identification information is not stopped and displayed, the display area of the predetermined image is set to be smaller than the identification information displayed in the second aspect, so that a more specific effect can be obtained. It can be made easier to see. That is, there is an effect that the visibility of the displayed image and the specific effect can be changed according to the type of the displayed display image, and the image to be visually recognized by the player can be appropriately displayed. ..

In the game machine A2, the predetermined image switching means hides the predetermined image when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means while the predetermined image is displayed by the predetermined image display means. A game machine A3 characterized by being switched to.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means while the predetermined image is displayed by the predetermined image display means, the predetermined image is not displayed by the predetermined image switching means. It can be switched to display.

As a result, when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific effect can be clearly displayed while the player can visually recognize the stopped and displayed identification information. On the other hand, when the predetermined image is displayed and the identification information is not stopped and displayed, the predetermined image is hidden, so that the specific effect can be more easily visually recognized. That is, there is an effect that the visibility of the displayed image and the specific effect can be changed according to the type of the displayed display image, and the image to be visually recognized by the player can be appropriately displayed. ..

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, a timekeeping means for measuring the timekeeping information and a period determination means for determining whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means are provided. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the specific effect display means executes the specific effect when the period determination means determines that the specific effect is in the execution period.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A3, the following effects are played. That is, the timekeeping information is timed by the timekeeping means, and based on the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means, it is determined by the period determination means whether or not it is the execution period of the specific effect. Then, when the period determination means determines that the specific effect is in the execution period, the specific effect display means executes the specific effect.

As a result, the player can be made to recognize the execution period of the specific effect based on the timekeeping information, so that the game can be started aiming at the execution period of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine A4 includes a specified information storage means for storing specified information for which a display period of the specific effect is defined in association with the timed information measured by the timed means, and the period determining means stores the specified information. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that it determines whether or not it is the execution period of the specific effect based on the specified information stored in the means and the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A4, the following effects are played. That is, the specified information in which the display period of the specific effect is defined in association with the timed information measured by the timed means is stored by the specified information storage means. Here, based on the specified information stored in the specified information storage means and the timed information measured by the timed means, the period determining means determines whether or not it is the execution period of the specific effect.

As a result, the period determination means can accurately determine whether or not it is the execution period of the specific effect by simply executing a simple process of comparing the specified information with the timekeeping information. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced by executing the process of determining whether or not it is the execution period of the specific effect.

The game machine A5 is provided with a remaining period specifying means for specifying the remaining period until the next display period of the specific effect is started, based on the specified information and the timed information measured by the timing means. The display mode switching means is characterized in that it switches to the second mode before the display period of the specific effect is started, based on the remaining period specified by the remaining period specifying means. Game machine A6.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A5, the following effects are played. That is, based on the specified information and the timekeeping information, the remaining period until the next display period of the specific effect is started is specified by the remaining period specifying means. Then, based on the remaining period specified by the remaining period specifying means, the display mode switching means switches to the second mode before the display period of the specific effect is started.

As a result, the display timing of the specific effect and the timing of switching to the second aspect can be shifted, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load at the display timing of the specific effect. ..

In the game machine A5 or A6, the specified information defines a first period, which is an execution period of the specific effect, and a second period, in which the specific effect is not executed. , A game machine A7 characterized in that the period is shorter than that of the second period.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A5 or A6, the following effects are produced. That is, the specified information defines a first period, which is an execution period of the specific effect, and a second period, in which the specific effect is not executed. The first period is configured to be shorter than the second period.

As a result, the execution period of the specific effect can be limited to a short period of time, so that the rarity of the specific effect can be increased. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player want to play the game during the execution period of the specific effect, there is an effect that the operating rate of the game machine can be improved.

The game machine A8 is characterized in that, in the game machine A7, the specified information is specified so that the first period and the second period are alternately repeated.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, the regulation information is defined so that the first period and the second period are alternately repeated. Therefore, by continuing the game for a long time, a specific effect can be produced. The game can be reliably performed in the first period to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to allow a player who wants to play a game during a specific effect to play a game for a long time, which has an effect of increasing the operating rate of the game machine.

In the game machine A1, when the dynamic display of the new identification information is not started by the dynamic display means until a certain period of time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display means, the stop display is displayed. When a predetermined image display means for displaying a predetermined image different from the identification information instead of the identification information and the specific effect display means execute the specific effect while the predetermined image is displayed by the predetermined image display means. The gaming machine A9 is provided with a transmission mode setting means for switching the display mode of the predetermined image to a translucent mode.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, when the dynamic display of the new identification information is not started by the dynamic display means until a certain period of time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display means, the identification information is replaced with the stopped display. A predetermined image different from the identification information is displayed by the predetermined image display means. Then, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means while the predetermined image is being displayed by the predetermined image display means, the display mode of the predetermined image is switched to the translucent mode by the transparent mode setting means.

As a result, when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific effect can be clearly displayed while the player can visually recognize the stopped and displayed identification information. On the other hand, when the predetermined image is displayed and the identification information is not stopped and displayed, the display area of the predetermined image is switched to the semi-transparent mode, so that the specific effect can be more easily visually recognized. That is, there is an effect that the visibility of the displayed image and the specific effect can be changed according to the type of the displayed display image, and the image to be visually recognized by the player can be appropriately displayed. ..

In the game machine A1, when the dynamic display of the new identification information is not started by the dynamic display means until a certain period of time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display means, the stop display is displayed. When a predetermined image display means for displaying a predetermined image different from the identification information in place of the identification information and the specific effect display means execute the specific effect while the predetermined image is displayed by the predetermined image display means. In addition to the predetermined image, the identification information display means for displaying the identification information stopped and displayed by the stop display means before the predetermined image is displayed in the second aspect is provided. Game machine A10 to play.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, when the dynamic display of the new identification information is not started by the dynamic display means until a certain period of time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display means, the identification information is replaced with the stopped display. A predetermined image different from the identification information is displayed by the predetermined image display means. Then, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means during the display of the predetermined image by the predetermined image display means, the stop display is stopped and displayed by the stop display means before the predetermined image is displayed instead of the predetermined image. The identification information is displayed in the second aspect by the identification information display means.

As a result, the same image can be displayed regardless of whether the specific effect is executed while the identification information is being displayed or the specific effect is executed while the predetermined image is being displayed. That is, when the specific effect is executed, it is not necessary to change the displayed image according to the type of the displayed image, so that the control when the specific effect is executed can be further simplified. effective.

In the game machine A1, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means during the stop display of the identification information by the stop display means in the first aspect, the display mode switching means is the first aspect. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the display mode of the identification information is switched so that the identification information during the stop display is hidden.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means during the stop display of the identification information by the stop display means in the first aspect, the first aspect. Since the display mode of the identification information is switched by the display mode switching means so that the identification information during the stop display is hidden, there is an effect that the specific effect can be displayed more clearly.
<Others>
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional game machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the design, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device. Here, in the conventional game machine, the priority for displaying the image is set. For example, the symbol directly related to whether or not it is a big hit is displayed so as to be clearly visible, and other images are displayed. Is displayed in an area other than the display area where the design is displayed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).
However, in a conventional gaming machine, when an image having a high priority is displayed, the display area for displaying another image becomes small, so that it may be difficult to visually recognize the other image. It was. That is, regardless of whether or not the image should be visually recognized by the player, the image becomes difficult to visually recognize, and there is a risk that the display content cannot be set to be suitable.
The technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that can be set to a suitable display content.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a display means for displaying a symbol, a dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a dynamic display means for displaying the identification information. The display means is provided with a privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game advantageous to the player when the dynamic display by the dynamic display means ends with predetermined identification information, and the display means is based on the establishment of a specific condition. In the first aspect, the specific effect display means for executing a specific effect different from the dynamic display of the identification information and the identification information displayed after the end of the dynamic display by the dynamic display means are stopped and displayed. When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means during the stop display of the display means and the identification information by the stop display means in the first aspect, the identification information in the stop display in the first aspect is displayed. The display mode switching means for switching the display mode of the identification information during the stop display is provided so that the display is displayed in the second mode in which the display area is smaller than that of the first mode.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in which the identification information is moved by the dynamic display means until a certain period of time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display means. During the display of the predetermined image by the predetermined image display means for displaying a predetermined image different from the identification information in place of the stop-displayed identification information when the target display is not started, and the predetermined image display means. When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means, the predetermined image switching means for switching the display mode of the predetermined image to a display mode having a smaller display area than the identification information displayed in the second aspect. It has.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2. In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the predetermined image switching means performs the specific effect by the specific effect display means while the predetermined image is displayed by the predetermined image display means. When executed, the predetermined image is switched so as to be hidden.
The game machine of the technical idea 4 is the game machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, and the timekeeping means for measuring the timekeeping information and the execution of the specific effect based on the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means. The specific effect display means includes a period determination means for determining whether or not it is a period, and executes the specific effect when the period determination means determines that the specific effect is an execution period. is there.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, based on the establishment of the specific condition, the specific effect display means executes a specific effect different from the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. The identification information displayed after the end of the dynamic display by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed by the stop display means in the first aspect. Then, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means during the stop display of the identification information by the stop display means in the first aspect, the identification information in the stop display in the first aspect is obtained from the first aspect. The display mode of the identification information during the stop display is switched by the display mode switching means so that the display is displayed in the second mode in which the display area is small.
As a result, the identification information displayed at the end of the previous dynamic display is displayed in the second mode so that the player can confirm the identification information, and the specific effect is executed in a larger display area. be able to. That is, the display area of the identification information in the stopped display state, which is less frequently confirmed by the player than when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display means or at the end of the dynamic display, is displayed. It can be reduced and the specific effect can be displayed more clearly. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to set a suitable display content.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, when the dynamic display of the new identification information is not started by the dynamic display means until a certain period of time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display means, the identification information is replaced with the stopped display. A predetermined image different from the identification information is displayed by the predetermined image display means. Further, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means while the predetermined image is displayed by the predetermined image display means, the display mode of the predetermined image is based on the identification information displayed in the second aspect by the predetermined image switching means. It is set to a display mode in which the display area is small.
As a result, when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific effect can be clearly displayed while the player can visually recognize the stopped and displayed identification information. On the other hand, when the predetermined image is displayed and the identification information is not stopped and displayed, the display area of the predetermined image is set to be smaller than the identification information displayed in the second aspect, so that a more specific effect can be obtained. It can be made easier to see. That is, there is an effect that the visibility of the displayed image and the specific effect can be changed according to the type of the displayed display image, and the image to be visually recognized by the player can be appropriately displayed. ..
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means while the predetermined image is displayed by the predetermined image display means. In addition, since the predetermined image is switched so as to be hidden by the predetermined image switching means, when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific effect is clarified while allowing the player to visually recognize the stopped and displayed identification information. Can be displayed on. On the other hand, when the predetermined image is displayed and the identification information is not stopped and displayed, the predetermined image is hidden, so that the specific effect can be more easily visually recognized. That is, there is an effect that the visibility of the displayed image and the specific effect can be changed according to the type of the displayed display image, and the image to be visually recognized by the player can be appropriately displayed. ..
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any one of Technical Thoughts 1 to 3. That is, the timekeeping information is timed by the timekeeping means, and based on the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means, it is determined by the period determination means whether or not it is the execution period of the specific effect. Then, when the period determination means determines that the specific effect is in the execution period, the specific effect display means executes the specific effect.
As a result, the player can be made to recognize the execution period of the specific effect based on the timekeeping information, so that the game can be started aiming at the execution period of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
292 RTC (Timekeeping Means)
S213 Benefits game execution unit S1404 period determination unit S1410 Display control means
S1605 Aspect setting means S2205 Dynamic display means S2813 Predetermined image switching means S2815 Display mode switching means S3010 Stop display means S3404 Predetermined image display means

Claims (2)

Display means that can display identification information and
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the identification in the first dynamic display aspect constituted the identification information comprises at least a first mode period that will be dynamically displayed in the first aspect predetermined in the display unit At least a dynamic display means that can dynamically display information ,
In a gaming machine provided with a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the stop display of a predetermined specific identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information.
A display control means for causing the display means to display a specific display different from the dynamic display of the identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition.
As a dynamic display mode when the at least part and the display period before Symbol specific display to start dynamic display of the identification information of the dynamic display periods overlap, the identification information in the first embodiment is dynamically displayed a second dynamic display form constituted the second aspect period specified display the identification information in the second aspect becomes easy to visually recognize can be dynamically displayed contains at least than that, the identification with the second aspect display information is liable said identification information in the display range of the specific display a broad and that display form first embodiment visually recognizes said specific indication than Ru dynamically displayed than when it is dynamically displayed One of a plurality of dynamic display modes including at least a third dynamic display mode including at least a third mode period , which is a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed in the third mode . A gaming machine including a mode setting means that can be set to a dynamic display mode. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be playable using a predetermined gaming medium.

Images